Spectrum

User Guide
Version 6.24
2/9/2010

Command Alkon Inc.

5168 Blazer Parkway
Dublin, Ohio 43017
Service Dept: 614.792.0677
Fax: 614.793.0608
Part Number: 25302
© 1970 - 2010 Command Alkon Incorporated. All rights reserved.

Command Alkon Incorporated believes the statements contained herein are accurate as of
the date of publication of this document. HOWEVER, COMMAND ALKON
INCORPORATED HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANT OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. In no event will
Command Alkon Incorporated be liable for any damages, including any lost profits, lost
savings, or other incidental or consequential damage arising out of the use of or inability to
use any information provided through this publication, even if Command Alkon Incorporated
has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any other party.
Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability or consequential damages, so
the above limitation may not apply.

This information is not intended to be an assertion of future action. The contents of this
document are for informational purposes only and are subject to change without notice.
Command Alkon Incorporated expressly reserves the right to change or withdraw current
products that may or may not have the same characteristics listed in this publication. Should
Command Alkon Incorporated modify its products in a way that may affect the information
contained in this publication, Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no obligation whatever
to inform any user of the modification.

This publication may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Command

Alkon Incorporated assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.
This publication is intended only for the direct benefit of users of Command Alkon
Incorporated products. This manual may not be used for any purposes other than those for
which it is provided. Information disclosed herein was originated by and is the property of
Command Alkon Incorporated, and, except for rights granted by written consent, such
information shall not be disclosed, disseminated, or duplicated in whole or in part. Command
Alkon Incorporated reserves all patent, proprietary, design, manufacturing, use, and
reproduction rights.

Command Alkon Incorporated

1800 International Park Drive, Suite 400

Birmingham, AL 35243-4232
(205) 879-3282

5168 Blazer Parkway

Dublin, OH 43017-1339
(614) 799-6650

www.commandalkon.com

Microsoft, Windows, and SQL are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of Redmond,

Washington.

COMMANDseries (and the names of its components, such as COMMANDconcrete and

COMMANDnetwork), Spectrum, Eagle, and COMMANDbatch are registered trademarks of
Command Alkon Incorporated. All rights reserved.

02/09/10 2
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CONTENTS
Contents ............................................................................................................................. 3
Introduction..................................................................................................................... 10
AUDIENCE ................................................................................................................................................ 10
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE ..................................................................................................................... 10
ª Mn/DOT Certification ............................................................................................................... 10
ª California Type Evaluation Program (CTEP) Approval .......................................................... 10
REVISIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 11
User’s Guide Terminology ............................................................................................. 13
ª Menu, Screen, and Database Names......................................................................................... 13
ª Menu and Screen Locations ...................................................................................................... 13
ª Field Names............................................................................................................................... 13
ª Keystroke Designations............................................................................................................. 13
ª Features & Functions................................................................................................................ 13
ª References to Other Sections of This Guide .............................................................................. 13
Spectrum System Terminology...................................................................................... 14
ª Database ................................................................................................................................... 14
ª Database Table ......................................................................................................................... 14
ª Record ....................................................................................................................................... 14
ª Field .......................................................................................................................................... 14
ª Nodes/Terminals........................................................................................................................ 14
ª Character .................................................................................................................................. 14
New Features ................................................................................................................... 15
Power-up and Shutdown Procedures............................................................................ 18
POWER-UP PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................................... 18
RESTARTING A NODE DURING THE DAY ................................................................................................... 19
BOOTING INTO DOS ................................................................................................................................. 19
USING WINDOWS FROM THE SPECTRUM ................................................................................................... 20
SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................................... 20
ª Quit Spectrum Procedure.......................................................................................................... 20
Navigating the System .................................................................................................... 21
ACCESSING SCREENS ................................................................................................................................ 21
MOVING WITHIN SCREENS ....................................................................................................................... 22
ª Selecting a Field........................................................................................................................ 22
ª Moving from Field to Field ....................................................................................................... 22
ª Selecting Entries from Browseable Fields ................................................................................ 23
ª Accessing Field Help................................................................................................................. 24
EXITING MENUS AND SCREENS ................................................................................................................ 24
Menu Layout ................................................................................................................... 25
ª Sub-Menus................................................................................................................................. 25
ª “*” Listed Beside a Report Item ............................................................................................... 25
ª “Nothing” Listed Beside a Report Item .................................................................................... 25
Basic Screen Layout........................................................................................................ 27
ª Current Time ............................................................................................................................. 28
ª Screen Title................................................................................................................................ 28
ª Function Key Prompts for Batching.......................................................................................... 28
ª Escape Key Prompt ................................................................................................................... 28
ª Function Key Prompts (Screen-Specific) .................................................................................. 28
The Spectrum Database ................................................................................................. 29
WHAT IS THE DATABASE? ........................................................................................................................ 29
HOW IS THE DATABASE ORGANIZED? ...................................................................................................... 29

02/09/10 3
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THE DATABASE? ............................................................................................. 29

TO ADD A DATABASE TABLE RECORD ..................................................................................................... 30
TO EDIT A DATABASE TABLE RECORD ..................................................................................................... 30
TO VIEW A DATABASE TABLE RECORD .................................................................................................... 31
TO DELETE A DATABASE TABLE RECORD ................................................................................................ 31
SCREENS NOT DISCUSSED IN THIS SECTION ............................................................................................. 31
SALES TAX RATES .................................................................................................................................... 32
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 32
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 32
CUSTOMERS.............................................................................................................................................. 33
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 33
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 34
INGREDIENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 35
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 36
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 42
ª Ingredient Groups ..................................................................................................................... 42
ª Absolute Value Ingredients ....................................................................................................... 43
ª Percentage Ingredients ............................................................................................................. 43
ª Hundred Weight Ingredients ..................................................................................................... 44
ª Ingredient Effectiveness ............................................................................................................ 44
MIX DESIGNS ........................................................................................................................................... 45
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 45
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 48
ª To Create a Mix Design ............................................................................................................ 50
ª To Change an Ingredient in All Mixes ...................................................................................... 51
ª To View Usage for a “Single” Mix Design ............................................................................... 51
ª To View Usage for “All” Mix Designs...................................................................................... 52
ADMIX DESIGNS ....................................................................................................................................... 53
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 53
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 54
ª To Create an Admix Design ...................................................................................................... 55
ª Ulink-Style Admix Modifiers ..................................................................................................... 56
RESALE PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................... 57
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 57
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 59
ª Ingredients Used as Resale Products........................................................................................ 60
ª Recording Incoming Inventory – Resale Products.................................................................... 61
TRUCKS .................................................................................................................................................... 62
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 62
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 63
PROJECTS ................................................................................................................................................. 64
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 65
ª Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 67
ª Project Pricing .......................................................................................................................... 67
ª Consistence and Ext. Description ............................................................................................. 68
EDIT MMM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 69
SLUMP TABLES ......................................................................................................................................... 70
ª What Is Slump? ......................................................................................................................... 70
ª Slump Calculations - Simplified ................................................................................................ 70
ª Setting Up Slump Tables ........................................................................................................... 72
ª Calculating Slump Using Slump Tables.................................................................................... 73
Configuring Plant Devices.............................................................................................. 75
BINS SCREEN ............................................................................................................................................ 76
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 77
ª Feed Configurations.................................................................................................................. 81

02/09/10 4
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Feed Types ........................................................................................................................................... 81

Possible Feed Configuration................................................................................................................. 82
SCALES SCREEN ....................................................................................................................................... 85
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 86
ª Motion Detection....................................................................................................................... 89
Setup..................................................................................................................................................... 89
Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 89
ª Flow Control Dampening.......................................................................................................... 91
Setup..................................................................................................................................................... 91
METERED LIQUIDS ................................................................................................................................... 93
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 93
ADMIXTURE BOTTLES .............................................................................................................................. 96
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 96
HOLDING TANKS ...................................................................................................................................... 98
ª Fields......................................................................................................................................... 98
CONVEYOR BELTS .................................................................................................................................. 100
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 100
EXTRA DEVICES ..................................................................................................................................... 102
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 102
Assigning Materials to Bins & Bottles ........................................................................ 104
MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS SCREEN ......................................................................................................... 104
ª To Assign Materials to a Device ............................................................................................. 104
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 105
ª Function Keys.......................................................................................................................... 105
AUTO BIN SWITCHING ............................................................................................................................ 106
ª Setup........................................................................................................................................ 106
ª Operation ................................................................................................................................ 106
ª Ticket Printing for Switched Bins............................................................................................ 107
Setting Feed Destinations ............................................................................................. 108
FEED DESTINATIONS SCREEN ................................................................................................................. 108
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 108
ª Function Keys.......................................................................................................................... 109
DEVICE PROPERTY SETS ......................................................................................................................... 110
ª Adding a New Property Set ..................................................................................................... 110
ª Editing an Existing Property Set ............................................................................................. 111
ª Deleting a device property set................................................................................................. 111
ª Manual Material Monitoring of PSET IO’s ............................................................................ 111
Batching & System Defaults ........................................................................................ 113
BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN ............................................................................................................... 113
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 114
SYSTEM DEFAULTS................................................................................................................................. 119
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 120
Material Calculations Screen....................................................................................... 123
OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................................................. 123
STANDARD CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................. 124
FIELDS – MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN ........................................................................................ 124
FUNCTION KEYS – MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN ......................................................................... 125
MATERIAL CALCULATION TYPES ........................................................................................................... 126
Slurry Calculations ....................................................................................................... 128
SETUPS ................................................................................................................................................... 128
Corrections Based on Ice.............................................................................................. 130
Creating Manual Station Labels ................................................................................. 131
Creating Ticket Layouts (Scripts) ............................................................................... 132
THE TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR SCREEN ................................................................................................... 132
Fields .................................................................................................................................................. 133

02/09/10 5
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Function Keys..................................................................................................................................... 136

THE TICKET ALIAS FILE ......................................................................................................................... 137
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 137
ª To Add an Alias Name............................................................................................................. 138
ª To Change an Alias Name....................................................................................................... 138
CREATING A NEW TICKET SCRIPT .......................................................................................................... 139
SPECIFYING WHICH TICKET SCRIPT TO USE ........................................................................................... 142
EDITING AN EXISTING TICKET SCRIPT .................................................................................................... 142
Printer Setup Screen..................................................................................................... 143
FIELDS – PRINTER SETUP SCREEN .......................................................................................................... 144
MULTI-BATCH PRINTING ........................................................................................................................ 146
SELECTING BATCH WEIGHT ITEMS FOR PRINTING .................................................................................. 146
BAR CODE PRINTING .............................................................................................................................. 148
ª Example: Printing a Bar-Code Ticket Number ...................................................................... 148
Bar Code Escape Sequence ................................................................................................................ 148
Print Bar Code Escape Sequence........................................................................................................ 149
Ticket Layout Editor Entries .............................................................................................................. 149
Configuring a Printer ................................................................................................... 150
TO SET UP A PRINTER............................................................................................................................. 150
ª Fields – Port Parameters Screen ............................................................................................ 151
ª Fields – Plant Screen .............................................................................................................. 155
Inventory........................................................................................................................ 158
OVERVIEW OF SPECTRUM INVENTORY FUNCTIONS ................................................................................ 158
INGREDIENT INVENTORY LEVELS – “SINGLE” PLANT ............................................................................. 159
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 160
ª Function Keys.......................................................................................................................... 160
INGREDIENT INVENTORY LEVELS – “ALL” PLANTS ................................................................................ 160
INGREDIENT USAGE DATA – “SINGLE” PLANT ....................................................................................... 161
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 162
ª Function Keys.......................................................................................................................... 162
INGREDIENT USAGE DATA – “ALL” PLANTS .......................................................................................... 162
RECORDING INCOMING INVENTORY - INGREDIENTS ............................................................................... 163
ª Function Keys.......................................................................................................................... 164
CLEARING INVENTORY ........................................................................................................................... 164
Setting Up User Accounts............................................................................................. 165
ª Fields – User Setup Screen ..................................................................................................... 166
USER SECURITY...................................................................................................................................... 168
Batching Operations ..................................................................................................... 170
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 170
ª Batching Cycle ........................................................................................................................ 170
ª Preact ...................................................................................................................................... 170
ª Feed Types............................................................................................................................... 171
Fast Feed ............................................................................................................................................ 171
Timed Feed......................................................................................................................................... 171
Jog Feed.............................................................................................................................................. 171
ª Multi-Batching ........................................................................................................................ 172
ª Feed Sequencing ..................................................................................................................... 172
ª Discharge Cycle ...................................................................................................................... 173
BASIC STEPS FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING .............................................................................................. 174
SCREENS USED FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING .......................................................................................... 175
ª Order Index and Load Index Screens...................................................................................... 175
Fields - Order Index............................................................................................................................ 176
Function Keys - Order Index .............................................................................................................. 177
Fields - Load Index............................................................................................................................. 178
Function Keys - Load Index ............................................................................................................... 179
ª Order Entry Screen ................................................................................................................. 180

02/09/10 6
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Fields .................................................................................................................................................. 180

Function Keys..................................................................................................................................... 182
To Enter an Order............................................................................................................................... 184
To Edit an Order................................................................................................................................. 184
To Copy an Order............................................................................................................................... 187
ª Concrete Calculator Screen .................................................................................................... 189
To Calculate Rectangular Shapes ....................................................................................................... 190
To Calculate Cylindrical Shapes ........................................................................................................ 190
ª Batch Setup Screen.................................................................................................................. 191
Fields .................................................................................................................................................. 192
Function Keys..................................................................................................................................... 194
Adjusting Batch Information .............................................................................................................. 195
ª The Graph Screen.................................................................................................................... 207
Fields – Graph Screen ........................................................................................................................ 209
Function Keys – Graph Screen ........................................................................................................... 210
Starting Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 211
Aborting Batches ................................................................................................................................ 211
TICKET PRINTING ................................................................................................................................... 212
ª Overview.................................................................................................................................. 212
ª Sample Ticket .......................................................................................................................... 213
ª Tolerance Error Symbols ........................................................................................................ 214
ª Editing Ticket Data ................................................................................................................. 215
ª Making a Local Ticket a Dispatch Ticket................................................................................ 216
ª Reprinting Tickets ................................................................................................................... 216
To Reprint the Last Ticket.................................................................................................................. 216
To Reprint an Older Ticket................................................................................................................. 216
ª Ticket Reports.......................................................................................................................... 216
BATCH WEIGHTS .................................................................................................................................... 217
ª Common Items on Batch Weight Reports................................................................................ 217
ª Tolerance Error Symbols ........................................................................................................ 221
ADVANCED BATCHING FEATURES .......................................................................................................... 222
ª Multi-Batching ........................................................................................................................ 222
Continuous Run .................................................................................................................................. 222
Freewheeling ...................................................................................................................................... 223
ª Quick Load .............................................................................................................................. 224
To Create Load Information Using Quick Load................................................................................. 224
To edit Quick Load information:........................................................................................................ 225
To batch a Quick Load batch:............................................................................................................. 225
ª Quick Ticket............................................................................................................................. 226
ª Bin Swapping .......................................................................................................................... 227
ª Quick Edit................................................................................................................................ 228
Fields .................................................................................................................................................. 228
Function Keys..................................................................................................................................... 228
ª Material Overview................................................................................................................... 229
Fields .................................................................................................................................................. 229
Function Keys..................................................................................................................................... 230
To Reassign Ingredients ..................................................................................................................... 230
To Activate/Deactivate a Device........................................................................................................ 231
To Change Feed and Discharge Parameters ....................................................................................... 231
ª Truck Washout......................................................................................................................... 232
Mixer Operation (For Plants with Mixers) ................................................................ 233
OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................................................. 233
MIXERS SCREEN ..................................................................................................................................... 234
ª Fields....................................................................................................................................... 234
Reports ........................................................................................................................... 238
PRINTING REPORTS................................................................................................................................. 238
CANCELING PRINTING OF ALL REPORTS ................................................................................................. 239
DISPLAY BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT ........................................................................................................ 239

02/09/10 7
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT (BY DATE) ..................................................................................................... 241

BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT (BY LOAD)..................................................................................................... 242
INCOMING INVENTORY REPORT.............................................................................................................. 243
MATERIAL USAGE BY MATERIAL........................................................................................................... 244
MATERIAL USAGE BY PLANT ................................................................................................................. 245
MATERIAL USAGE BY BIN ...................................................................................................................... 246
MIX INVENTORY ..................................................................................................................................... 247
RESALE PRODUCT INVENTORY ............................................................................................................... 248
AVERAGE MOISTURE REPORT ................................................................................................................ 249
INGREDIENT LISTING .............................................................................................................................. 250
MIX DESIGN LISTING.............................................................................................................................. 251
MIX DESIGN SUMMARY.......................................................................................................................... 252
CUSTOMER LISTING ................................................................................................................................ 253
CURRENT ORDERS .................................................................................................................................. 254
ALL ORDERS .......................................................................................................................................... 255
SELECT ORDER DATES ........................................................................................................................... 256
LOADS BY ORDER .................................................................................................................................. 257
ORDERS BY PLANT ................................................................................................................................. 258
PROJECT LISTING.................................................................................................................................... 259
PROJECTS BY CUSTOMER ....................................................................................................................... 260
EXPIRED PROJECTS ................................................................................................................................. 261
PROJECTS BY LAST USED DATE ............................................................................................................. 262
RESALE PRODUCTS LISTING ................................................................................................................... 263
C.O.D. TICKETS ..................................................................................................................................... 264
VOIDED TICKETS .................................................................................................................................... 265
TICKETS BY CUSTOMER .......................................................................................................................... 266
MATERIAL COSTS ................................................................................................................................... 267
FLEET UTILIZATION ................................................................................................................................ 268
TRUCK PRODUCTION REPORT ................................................................................................................. 269
MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR .............................................................................................................. 270
SEQUENCE LISTING ................................................................................................................................ 271
End of Day Procedures................................................................................................. 272
CATEGORIES ........................................................................................................................................... 272
SELECTING WHAT TO RUN ..................................................................................................................... 272
RUNNING “END OF” PROCESSES ............................................................................................................. 274
Function Keys – The End of Day Procedure Screen .......................................................................... 275
EXPORTING BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER ........................................................................................ 276
ª To Export Batch Weights: ....................................................................................................... 276
PROPER SHUTDOWN WHEN EOD IS NOT RUN ...................................................................................... 278
Disk Utilities .................................................................................................................. 279
FLOPPY/REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP & RESTORE ................................................................................ 280
ª Backups To Floppy Disk or USB Removable Device.............................................................. 280
To Back Up to Floppy Disk:............................................................................................................... 280
To Back Up to USB Removable Device: ........................................................................................... 281
ª Restores from Floppy Disk or USB Removable Device .......................................................... 282
To Restore from Floppy Disk:............................................................................................................ 282
To Restore from USB Removable Device:......................................................................................... 282
HARD DISK BACKUP & RESTORE ........................................................................................................... 283
ª To Back Up to Hard Disk:....................................................................................................... 283
ª To Restore from Hard Disk:.................................................................................................... 284
BATCH WEIGHTS BACKUP & RESTORE................................................................................................... 286
ª To Backup Batch Weights: ...................................................................................................... 286
ª To Restore Batch Weights: ...................................................................................................... 287
EXPORT TICKETS TO DOS FILE .............................................................................................................. 288
ª To Export Ticket Data:............................................................................................................ 288
EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER .............................................................................................. 290

02/09/10 8
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª To Export Batch Weights: ....................................................................................................... 290

FORMAT DISKS ....................................................................................................................................... 292
ª To Format a Floppy Disk:....................................................................................................... 292
ª Formatting a USB Removable Device for QNX ...................................................................... 293
ª Formatting a USB Removable Device for DOS ...................................................................... 293
IMPORT DATA FILES ............................................................................................................................... 295
ª To Import Mix Designs: .......................................................................................................... 295
Index............................................................................................................................... 297
APPENDICES:
A: E-Z CAL MANUAL STATION
B: MOISTURE PROBE INSTALLATION
C: SPECTRUM SETUP FOR STATE INSPECTIONS
D: MIX DESIGN POLYNOMIALS SETUP GUIDE

02/09/10 9
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on your purchase of Command Alkon’s Spectrum Batching
System for your ready-mix concrete company. Spectrum offers you complete
ready-mix operations functionality; including batching, reporting, quality control,
scheduling, order tracking, inventory, dispatching, and mix design maintenance
management. All aspects of the Spectrum System are linked through a central
database. Spectrum can also be linked to existing accounting or general ledger
software.

Spectrum also offers you direct control of your concrete mixing and batching
activities. With Command Alkon’s moisture probe, you can generate an accurate
reading of material moistures at any point in the batching process, allowing you to
accurately determine the amount of water necessary for the desired mix.

This Guide is designed to help you make the most of your new Spectrum System.
We’re sure you’ll find that working with Spectrum will lead to more efficient
operation of your ready-mix concrete company. Ensuring the accuracy and speed
of your batching processes will allow you to react quickly to changing conditions
and improve your ability to respond to customer needs.

AUDIENCE
This Guide is intended for the use of managers, dispatchers, and batch persons
who operate ready-mix concrete plants. Additional technical material regarding
the Spectrum System is available through Command Alkon Technical Support at
(614) 792-0677.

REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

ª MN/DOT CERTIFICATION

Spectrum V6.19B (and later) produces a Certificate of Compliance (concrete

batch ticket) that complies with Mn/DOT Specification 2461.4D7a, dated
September 7, 2001.

ª CALIFORNIA TYPE EVALUATION PROGRAM (CTEP) APPROVAL

Certificate Number: 5534-07

This device was evaluated under the California Type Evaluation Program (CTEP)
and was found to comply with the applicable technical requirements of California
Code of Regulations for “Weighing and Measuring Devices”.

02/09/10 10
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

REVISIONS

September 22, 2000 • Updated section on Exporting Batch Weights to include the
option of exporting load-level weights.
• Restructured Ticket Printing information.
• Added more details about batch weights (on reports and tickets).
• Added section on Mixer Operation.
June 20, 2001 Added information about using math calculations in the Data
column of the Ticket Layout Editor (see “The Ticket Layout Editor
Screen”).
August 21, 2001 Added sub-section about Ulink Admix Modifiers to the “Admix
Designs” section.
August 28, 2001 Added example of Truck Production Report.
September 7, 2001 • Added section on Slump Tables and slump calculations.
• Updated list of new features for V6.18.
September 11, 2001 Added sections on Batching Defaults and System Defaults screens.
September 20, 2001 Added section on Device Property Sets.
October 9, 2001 Updated description of Batch Weight options and moved this
information from the Reports section to just before the Advanced
Batching Features section.
October 12, 2001 • Updated field descriptions for Ingredients screen.
• Replaced old disclaimer page with the new one.
October 15, 2001 Updated field descriptions for Batch Weights reports according to
new oven dry moisture calculation changes.
October 16, 2001 Added sections on Material Calculations screen and Slurry
Calculations.
February 27, 2002 • Added section on setting up the printer, and updated description
of ‘Tracepoints’ field of Port Parameters screen.
• Updated description of ‘Record SOZ as Batched?’ field of
Ingredients screen.
March 1, 2002 • Updated description of ‘Tracepoints’ field of Ingredients screen.
• Updated descriptions of items on Batch Weights reports.
April 4, 2002 Added sections on “Editing Truck Code Before Discharge” and
“Editing Truck Code After Discharge” to the “Adjusting Batching
Information” section.
August 19, 2003 to Updated the user guide for V6.19. Consolidated the U.S. and Metric
September 30, 2003 user guides into one.
Note: The U.K. switch_date script is now incorporated into the
general release. The script file makes the required .profile and

02/09/10 11
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

message file modifications then recompiles the msgfile.bin file.

Backup files are created as before.
April 5, 2004 Updated user guide for V6.20A.
May 3, 2004 Final proof for print vendor.
November 16, 2004 Added appendices to the PDF for the print vendor.
March 16, 2005 Updated the manual for V6.21A (see New Features for a list of
features added to this guide).
March 17, 2005 Updated descriptions for Fast, Timed, and Jog feed types.
March 21, 2005 Corrected description of Jog Feed and reviewed final proof for print
vendor.
May 9, 2006 Added feature enhancements for V6.22A and V6.22B.
Moved the section on setting up a serial scale to the External Serial
Device Setup Guide.
December 20, 2006 Re-posted manual on Command Alkon website.
January 5, 2007 • Updated the manual with the following feature enhancement for
V6.23A: The Batch Weight Options screen now includes a flag
called “Print Batched UOM” that must be set to “Y” for state
inspections so that printed scale or meter values use the same
UOM as their respective measuring devices.
• Added a section to the Introduction about regulatory compliance
with Mn/DOT and CTEP state inspection requirements.
July 31, 2007 • Revised description of the Allow Link Mix Conversion field of
the System Defaults screen to require that this flag be set to ‘Y’.
• Prepared new V6.23 masters for the print vendor.
August 14, 2007 Added CTEP approval number (5534-07) to page 10.
July 10, 2008 Replaced all instances of Zip disk with USB removable device.
Change is effective for V6.23B.08 and later.
September 23, 2008 Added the section: “Making a Local Ticket a Dispatch Ticket”.
November 10, 2008 Updated this manual for V6.24A.
April 28, 2009 Added new User Setup screen example showing the Enforce Based
On Check field, along with a description of this new field.
July 6, 2009 Updated the list of Calculation Types used on the Material
Calculations Screen to include the “I” and “J” types that deal with
excluding returned concrete amounts from load size calculations.
Also added a text description of each calculation type.
Feb. 9, 2010 Added description of “Auto HH:MM:SS” and “Manual
HH:MM:SS” to Common Items on Batch Weight Reports section.

02/09/10 12
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

USER’S GUIDE TERMINOLOGY

The following conventions are used throughout this Guide to bring attention to
fields, screens, menus, keystroke commands, and features.

ª MENU, SCREEN, AND DATABASE NAMES

When a particular Spectrum menu, screen, or database table is discussed in the
text, its name appears in the following style:
CUSTOMERS screen

ª MENU AND SCREEN LOCATIONS

Screen locations within the Spectrum system are indicated as follows:
MAIN MENU ­DATA ENTRY ­CUSTOMERS

For example, to access the CUSTOMERS screen indicated above, start at the MAIN
MENU, select “Data Entry,” then select “Customers” from the DATA ENTRY
menu.

ª FIELD NAMES
When a field is discussed, its name appears in the following style:
Order field

ª KEYSTROKE DESIGNATIONS
Keyboard letter keys are displayed in bold font inside square brackets as follows:
[F2] [ENTER] [TAB]

Keystroke combinations (pressing two or more keys at the same time) are shown
with a plus sign (+) between the key’s names. Example:
[ALT + C]

ª FEATURES & FUNCTIONS

Where possible, features and system functions appear in the following formats:
Batch on Receipt feature
Update Inventory function

ª REFERENCES TO OTHER SECTIONS OF THIS GUIDE

Sections of this Guide are cross-referenced as follows:
(See “Batching Operations” for more information.)

02/09/10 13
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SPECTRUM SYSTEM TERMINOLOGY

The following terminology is used throughout this Guide when referring to
different parts of the Spectrum System.

ª DATABASE
A database is a group of electronically stored information that can be retrieved
and used so that it does not have to be re-typed every time it is needed. The
Spectrum System contains a single database for your company. Most of the
information stored in the Spectrum database is accessible through DATA ENTRY
screens.

ª DATABASE TABLE
The Spectrum System database consists of many tables. Each table contains
separate, like information (e.g., information on customers is stored in its own
CUSTOMER database table).

ª RECORD
A record is a collection of information about a specific item in a database table.
A table can have many records. For example, the information stored for one
customer is a record. Records are composed from information stored in fields.
Records are viewed, created, and modified using DATA ENTRY screens.

ª FIELD
All data is entered into fields. Each time you view a Spectrum screen, you are
looking at an assortment of fields. Think of a screen as a form with fields as
blanks where you enter data. Each field contains a particular type of data (e.g.,
Customer Name, Unit Price, Project Number, etc.).

ª NODES/TERMINALS
All IBM PC-compatible computers are called Nodes. Attached serial terminals
are referred to as Terminals.

ª CHARACTER
The term character refers to a single letter, symbol, or digit. For example, “A”,
“*”, and “2” are each a single character. In contrast, the number “100” is three
characters long. Each field consists of a certain number of characters.

02/09/10 14
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

NEW FEATURES
The following features have been added to the Spectrum software since Version 6.18.
The current software version is 6.23.
Note: Information about feature enhancements is provided in the Release Notes for the
appropriate Spectrum version.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION VER.

Multi-Tier Tolerances You can now enter tolerances for small loads. Per 6.19B
ASTM guidelines, once set of tolerances is used if
the target weight is over 30 percent of the scale
capacity, and another set is used if the target
weight is under 30 percent of the scale capacity.
Batch Size Round By A field for entering a round-by factor for batch 6.19B
Factor sizes has been added to page 2 of the Batching
Defaults screen (New York State requirement).
Final MnDOT Changes You can now print MnDOT standard column 6.19B
headers on the batch weights portion of tickets by
selecting this option on the Batch Weights
Options screen.
Extra Devices Now Extra devices with temper/external interfaces are 6.19B
Displayed on Graphics now displayed on the Graphics, Readout Display,
Screen and Scale Meter I/O screens. New fields were
also added to the Extra Devices Screen.
Specific Gravity can now You can now select this option on the Batch 6.19B
be printed with Batch Weight Options screen so that the specific gravity
Weights percentage for gray water systems can be printed.
User Security not needed Users who do not have access to the Plant Setup 6.19B
to Print Event Log menu can now print the Event Log from the
Readout Display screen, which can be accessed
from the Reports menu or by pressing <F3> from
the Batch Setup screen.
Effectiveness Field now This field on the Ingredients screen now allows 6.19B
has 2 Decimal Places two decimal places.
EN-206 Changes Two new fields have been added to some 6.20A
Spectrum screens to describe concrete production
in terminology required by the EN 206 Standards.
The new fields are: Ext. Description and
Consistence. Affected forms are Mix Designs,
Projects, Orders, Batch Setup, and Ticket Editor.

02/09/10 15
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION VER.

Average Moisture Report This report is new. It shows average monthly 6.20A
moisture for materials used for batching. Both
SSD and total moisture averages are shown.
The “Average Moisture” selection has been added
to the menu for Inventory reports under the
Reports Menu.
End of Day / End of Week You can now select the “Average Moisture” and 6.20A
Modifications “Truck Production” reports on the End of Day and
End of Week Setup screens. These reports will
then be printed when the End of Day and End of
Week processes are run.
Spectrum I/O Mapping Because Eagle counters are not defined by IO 6.20A
Modified for Eagle position, Spectrum’s digital IO mapping and
counter mapping have been reworked to not use
hard-coded mapping. Also, Eagle scales and
counters have been reworked so that a maximum
of 32 can be defined.
Can Now Use Batch-level All devices used in a load have internal batch- 6.20A
Variables as Global level variables of a specific pattern. Example:
BIN01 has batch level variables BIN01_STAR,
BIN01_SCAL, BIN01_ATAR, etc. If a global
variable that matches a batch-level variable is
entered on the Custom Controls Editor, the system
now maps the value of the batch-level variable to
the global variable. For example, the user could
enter "CEM SCALE_ATAR" on the Custom
Controls Editor. Then when the system was
rebooted, the system would create the variable as
global.
Junction Box Test in You can now use the Junction Box Test function 6.20A
Training Mode when no manual station is attached. To do this,
set the Default Simulation field on the Batching
Defaults screen to “T”. Then you can toggle IO
points on the Junction Box Test screen.
Main ScoreBoard Starts The main ScoreBoard program now starts device- 6.20A
Device-Based based scoreboard programs (if any are defined)
ScoreBoards before checking for the main scoreboard.
IO Values Sent as ASCII IO values can now be sent in ASCII format from a 6.20A
from Serial Ports serial port. The following two serial converters
that take in serial data and output 4-20mA can be
used:
Advantech Model: ADAM-4020
(www.advantech.com)
icpdas Model: I-7021 (www.icpdas.com)

02/09/10 16
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FEATURE DESCRIPTION VER.

Motion Detection Motion Detection ensures that a scale’s reading is 6.21A
stable before its value is recorded.
Auto Bin Switching Auto Bin Switching causes the system to 6.21A
automatically select an alternate source without
operator intervention when a feed timeout occurs.
Flow Control Dampening Flow Control Dampening allows scale flow rates 6.21A
to be dampened to allow more precise feed cutoff
calculations and drop determinations.
USB Support for Backups This feature allows Spectrum data to be backed up 6.23B
and Data Transfers and exported to a USB device, as well as restored
data from a USB device. The USB device is
typically a QNX formatted “thumb drive” and
replaces the Zip drive and disk.

02/09/10 17
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

POWER-UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES

POWER-UP PROCEDURE
The Spectrum System’s power-up procedure involves two steps, which should
always be performed in the following order:

1. Turning on the Spectrum computer, and

2. Turning on plant power.

If the Spectrum was not properly shut down before it was turned off, it
automatically rebuilds the database. Otherwise, the Spectrum starts immediately.
Once the Spectrum is turned on, the MAIN MENU shown below is displayed. You
can now turn on the plant power.

Main Menu

NOTE: Control power to the Manual Station should always be left on.

02/09/10 18
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

RESTARTING A NODE DURING THE DAY

CAUTION ! Nodes other than Node 1 can be restarted without causing data
corruption problems. If you must restart Node 1, ask ALL
other users to stop their activity first. If Node 1 is restarted in
the middle of the day, all other nodes must also be rebooted.

The preferred method for rebooting a node is to use the keyboard. To reboot a
node from the keyboard, press and hold [CTRL+SHIFT+ALT], then press the
[DEL] key on the numeric keypad. Next, release all the keys. The screen counts
down from 10 to 0, then the node reboots.

If after several attempts the keyboard reset method does not reboot the node,
press, then release the RESET button on the front panel of the node if the node
has such a button.

If neither of the above methods works, switch the node’s power off then back on
using the node's main power switch. This places stress on the node’s circuits, and
should be used only as a last resort.

BOOTING INTO DOS

Besides the QNX 4.2 partition, DOS and Windows programs can also reside on
Node hard drives or partitions. If the DOS hard disk partition has not been
deleted, nodes other than Node 1 may be shut down at any time, restarted with
DOS, used with DOS or Windows programs, then restarted with the Spectrum
without affecting the operation of the other nodes.

To start the node with DOS:

1. Reboot the node by pressing [CTRL+SHIFT+ALT], then pressing the
[DEL] key.
2. Release all of the keys.
3. When the node screen displays “Boot Partition X”, where “X” is the number
of the hard disk partition that is booting up, press the number of the partition
on which you have installed DOS.

To return to Spectrum, exit DOS, then press [CTRL+ALT+DEL]. Release all of

the keys at the same time.

02/09/10 19
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

USING WINDOWS FROM THE SPECTRUM

Customers with the Microsoft Windows Access from Spectrum option may start
Windows directly from the Spectrum without rebooting the PC. Do NOT start
Windows on a node when that node is in the middle of a batch. To start Windows
from Spectrum, press [ALT + W]. Starting Windows will not affect the operation
of other nodes, but the node on which you started Windows will not be able to
batch until you exit Windows. When you exit Windows, the Spectrum screen will
re-appear.

SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE
Shutdown is automatically performed at the end of the End of Day process. If
you wish to shut down before the end of the day, the Quit Spectrum procedure
given below should always be followed.

CAUTION! Never shut the computer’s power off unless you perform either
an End of Day or a Quit Spectrum procedure. Failure to do so
can result in data loss.

ª QUIT SPECTRUM PROCEDURE

1. Select MAIN MENU­QUIT SPECTRUM. A warning screen appears.

2. Press [F1] to acknowledge the warning. The system begins the shutdown
process (this may take a few minutes). The Spectrum system informs you
when shutdown is complete.
3. Turn off the power to the Spectrum computer.

NOTE: If you try to quit the Spectrum while a batch is in progress, a

warning message appears. You can continue with the shutdown
(by pressing [F1]), but inventory and other data may be
affected.

02/09/10 20
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

NAVIGATING THE SYSTEM

ACCESSING SCREENS
Menus. Spectrum screens are accessible through menus. Available screens are
listed as menu items (see the sample screen below). Activating a menu item is as
easy as selecting the option on the menu and pressing [ENTER]. To select a
menu item, press the [↓] key to move down to the item, or the [↑] key to move
up. Each time you press one of the arrow keys, the cursor is moved up or down
one line.

Main Menu

Sub-Menus. Some menus have sub-menus. A “>” symbol is shown to the right
of each sub-menu as shown on the screen below. A sub-menu is accessed the
same way as any menu item (by highlighting it and pressing [ENTER]).

Function Keys. Function keys (F1 through F12 at the top of the keyboard) are
also used to access certain screens. When function keys are used in this way,
labels are provided. Labels for F1 through F8 are provided at the bottom of the
screen, labels for F9 through F12 at the top.

NOTE: F9 through F12 are reserved for batching functions (F9 - RUN, F10 -
HOLD, F11 - DISCH, and F12 - GRAPH).

02/09/10 21
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MOVING WITHIN SCREENS

ª SELECTING A FIELD

To enter data into a specific field, that field must be selected. When a field is
selected, it is highlighted in a distinct color – usually light blue (this cannot be
shown in the example below). Customer Code is the selected field below.
When a new screen is accessed, the top-leftmost field is typically selected by
default.

Field (selected)

ª MOVING FROM FIELD TO FIELD

As mentioned above, the cursor is normally on the top, leftmost field when you
access a screen. To move forward one field at a time, press one of the following
keys: [TAB], [ENTER], or [↓]. To move backward one field at a time, press
either [SHIFT+TAB] or the [↑] key.

02/09/10 22
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª SELECTING ENTRIES FROM BROWSEABLE FIELDS

Browseable fields have square brackets around the entry area as shown in the
previous example. By pressing [F2] from the browseable Customer field below,
you can pull up a list of valid customer entries. You can then use the up and
down arrow keys to highlight the desired entry, and press [ENTER] to pull the
entry into the Customer field.

Field Browse List

SHORTCUTS:

• To move to the next page of a browse list, press [PAGE DOWN]; to move to
the previous page, press [PAGE UP].
• To move to the end of a browse list, press [END]; to move to the beginning of
a browse list, press [HOME].
• Incremental Search. After pressing [F2], you can type the first letter of the
entry you want from the list. When the browse list appears, the first entry
beginning with that letter is highlighted. To get even closer to the desired
entry, you can type the second letter, then the third, and so on.

02/09/10 23
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª ACCESSING FIELD HELP

Additional information is available online for many fields. To access online help
for a non-browseable field, select the desired field and press [F2]. To access
online help for a browseable field, select the desired field and press [F2] two
times. If no online help exists for the selected field, the system displays a
message stating that no online help is available.

EXITING MENUS AND SCREENS

To exit a menu or a screen, press [ESC]. This method of exiting removes menus
and screens sequentially until you get to the MAIN MENU.

NOTE: To shut down the Spectrum, always follow the “Shutdown

Procedure” given in this guide.

02/09/10 24
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MENU LAYOUT
To help you understand how the Spectrum system functions, we have provided a
menu layout diagram on the following page. There are many screens listed in the
diagram, but don’t worry. You don’t have to know about them all. Screens
dealing with plant and system setup, for instance, are not even listed on your
Main Menu. Only those screens pertinent to running batches are listed on your
Main Menu.

ª SUB-MENUS

As you look at the diagram on the next page, notice that everything flows from
the MAIN MENU. The Main Menu is the gateway to all system functions,
including batching. Menu items followed by a “>” are sub-menus. For example,
the “Data Entry” item on the Main Menu is a sub-menu of the Main Menu.
Similarly, “Update Inventory” is a sub-menu of the Data Entry Menu.

ª “*” LISTED BESIDE A REPORT ITEM

An asterisk “*” is shown to the right of the some of Reports. This means the
report will be generated and sent directly to the printer when you select the item
and press [ENTER].

ª “NOTHING” LISTED BESIDE A REPORT ITEM

Some reports have neither a “>” or a “*” beside them. This means another screen
appears so you can enter specific parameters for the report (e.g., a range of dates).
Examples of these kinds of reports are Fleet Utilization and Current Orders.

02/09/10 25
 Spectrum Menu Structure
MAIN MENU
Customers
BATCH SETUP Edit Tickets Daily Inventory
Update Inventory > Weekly Inventory
Ingredients Monthly Inventory
Mix Designs Yearly Inventory
Resale Products
LOAD INDEX Orders
Projects
Sales Tax Rates
Trucks Display Batch Weights
Concrete Calculator Batch Weights by Date
DISPATCH Batchbook Base Mix Batch Weights by Load
Batchbook Cement Mix
Admix Designs
Edit MMM Description Incoming Inventory
Mat'l Usage by Material
DATA ENTRY > Batch Wt Reports > Mat'l Usage by Plant Current Orders
Inventory Reports > Material Usage by Bin Tomorrow's Orders *
Ingredient Listing * Mix Inventory Yesterday's Orders *
Mix Design Listing * Resale Prod Inventory Future Orders *
Mix Summary Rpt * Past Orders *
ORDER INDEX Customer Listing * All Orders *
Order Reports > Project Listing * Select Order Dates
Project Reports > Project by Customer * Loads by Order
Resale Products Listing Expired Projects Orders by Plant
Ticket Reports > Projects by Last Used Date
REPORTS > Fleet Utilization
Manual Material Monitor C.O.D. Tickets
Sequence Listing * Voided Tickets
Cancel Report * Non-C.O.D. Tickets
All tickets Floppy/Removable Media Backup
END OF DAY Material Overview Tickets by Customer & Restore
Bins & Silos Hard Disk Backup & Restore
Scales Batching Defaults Batch Weights Backup & Restore
Decumulative Scales Port Parameters Export Tickets to DOS File
Metered Liquids Modem & Terminal Parameters Purge & Rebuild Database
PLANT SETUP > Admixture Bottles System Defaults Rebuild Individual Database Index
Holding Tanks Time & Date Setup Repair Corrupt Database File
Conveyor Belts Mix Classes Format Disk
Extra Devices Printer Setup Floppy Disk Copy
SYSTEM Events Plants Import Data Files
MAINTENANCE > Truck Device Users Winlink File Transfer
Mixers User Login Convert Database Files From 6.04
Material Assignments Material Calculations Convert Ticket Files From 6.04
Sequences Ticket Layout Editor Convert Database Files From 6.05+
Feed Destinations Batch Weight Options Update Spectrum
QUIT SPECTRUM I/O Assignments Disk Utilities > Purge Batchbook Mixes
Junction Box Test Custom Controls Editor
Exercise I/O Manual Station Labels > Left Buttons (A & B)
Readout Display S.O. Number & Customer Name Right Buttons (C & D)
Scale/Meter I/O Network Update Left Scales
USER LOGIN Quick Edit Debugging by Node Right Scales

NOTES: > means the item is another menu.

* means the report will be generated and printed.

02/09/10 26
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BASIC SCREEN LAYOUT

Each Spectrum screen has its own function, but the layout of most screens is similar.
For example, function key prompts for batching are always displayed at the top-right
corner. The example below shows items common to most screens. Each item is
explained in more detail on the following page.

Function Key Prompts

Current Time Screen Title [F9] – [F12]
(Always the Same)

11:09 01 5 RUN 5 HOLD 5 DISCH 5 GRAPH 5

CUSTOMER
+)))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))),
* Customer Code [ ] *
* Customer Name *
/))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))1
* Account Number *
* Account Status Credit Limit *
* User Defined Account Balance *
* Tax Zone [ ] *
* Returned Concrete Allowed? *
* C.O.D.? Print Prices? *
/))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))1
* Address *
* Address *
* P.O. Box *
* City *
* State/County Zip/Postal Code *
/))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))1
* Contact Name *
* Phone Number ( ) - *
* Notes *
.))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))-
Escape Save * Browse * * * * Clear * Delete

[ESCAPE] Key
Prompt Function Key Prompts
[F1] – [F8]
(Screen-Specific)

02/09/10 27
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª CURRENT TIME

The current time as set in the Spectrum system is displayed in the top-left corner.

ª SCREEN TITLE

A screen title appears at the top-center of every screen, except the GRAPH screen.

ª FUNCTION KEY PROMPTS FOR BATCHING

These prompts appear at the top-right of every screen so you can control the batch
in progress while working on other screens. They are always: [F9] for Run;
[F10] for Hold; [F11] for Discharge; and [F12] to pull up the GRAPH screen or to
return to the previous screen.

IMPORTANT! It is highly recommended that you run batches from the

BATCH SETUP screen only. You can start batches from
other Spectrum screens if this option is activated (per user),
but you cannot see which order is currently active.

ª ESCAPE KEY PROMPT

This prompt appears at the bottom-left of every screen. It is used to exit the
screen. If you keep pressing [ESCAPE], you will end up back at the MAIN
MENU.

ª FUNCTION KEY PROMPTS (SCREEN-SPECIFIC)

These prompts (for Function keys [F1] - [F8]) appear along the bottom of every
screen. They are different from screen to screen. For example, on Data Entry
screens [F1] is used to save data, while on the Load Index screen it is used to
access the BATCH SETUP screen. [F2] is typically used to access field help.

02/09/10 28
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

THE SPECTRUM DATABASE

WHAT IS THE DATABASE?

As stated earlier in this guide, a database is a group of electronically stored
information that can be retrieved and used so that the same information does not have
to be re-typed every time it is needed. The Spectrum System contains a single
database for your company.

HOW IS THE DATABASE ORGANIZED?

Each screen listed on the DATA ENTRY menu represents a database table that
contains a particular kind of information. The Customers database table, for example,
contains information about customers only. Each database table is further subdivided
into records. A Customer record, for example, contains information about one
particular customer. When you add a customer, you are adding another record to the
Customer database table.

WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THE DATABASE?

Essential, business-related information such as customer names, mix designs,
materials, trucks, and drivers is entered into and maintained in the Spectrum database.
This data can then be inserted into other Spectrum screens (e.g., the ORDERS or
PROJECTS screens) so the same information does not have to be re-typed each time it
is needed.

The database is also used to maintain inventory records. When materials are added or
used, the amounts are either added to or deducted from current amounts stored in the
database.

Database information is automatically saved on the hard drive. However, it should

also be backed up on (either on floppy disk or USB removable device) through the
Spectrum’s Disk Utilities function. For added security, printed copies should also be
made.

Most of the information stored in the Spectrum database is accessible through DATA
ENTRY screens, which are accessed through the DATA ENTRY MENU (shown next).
DATA ENTRY screens are discussed in this section. However, they are not discussed
in the order they appear on the menu. Rather, they are discussed in the order in
which they should be set up. For example, Customers are discussed before Orders
because customer information is used for order entry.

02/09/10 29
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TO ADD A DATABASE TABLE RECORD

Records are added, edited, and viewed the same way for all database tables; therefore,
this information will only be presented once.

1. Access the appropriate table through the DATA ENTRY menu.

2. In the Code field, type the code you are assigning to the record.
3. Fill in the remaining fields as appropriate.
4. Press [F1] to save the new record.

Remember: When you save a data entry screen, you are saving a record.

TO EDIT A DATABASE TABLE RECORD

1. Access the table that contains the record you wish to edit.
2. In the Code field, type or select from the browse list the code of the record
you wish to edit.
3. Press [ENTER] to bring that record to the screen.
4. Tab to the field you want to change. Type over or delete the existing data.
Do this for each field whose data you want to change.
5. Press [F1] to save the changes.

TIPS: • To cancel the changes you just made, press [F7] before you exit
the screen.
• To delete the record altogether, press [F8].

02/09/10 30
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TO VIEW A DATABASE TABLE RECORD

1. Access the table that contains the record you wish to edit.
2. In the Code field, type or select the code of the record you wish to edit.
3. Press [ENTER] to bring that record to the screen.

TO DELETE A DATABASE TABLE RECORD

1. Access the table that contains the record you wish to delete.
2. In the Code field, type or select the code of the record you wish to delete.
3. Press [ENTER] to bring that record to the screen.
4. Press the [F8] - Delete key. When prompted, press this key again to confirm.

SCREENS NOT DISCUSSED IN THIS SECTION

The following screens are not discussed in this section. Rather, they are discussed in
other sections of this Guide or in one of the appendices.

Data Entry Screen: Location in this Guide

Update Inventory “Inventory” section.
Orders “Batching Operations” section.
Concrete Calculator “Batching Operations” section.
Batchbook Base Mix See Appendix D.
Batchbook Cement Mix See Appendix D.

02/09/10 31
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SALES TAX RATES

Sales tax rates are stored in a database table and can be applied to product sales.
To access the SALES TAX RATES screen, select MAIN MENU­DATA
ENTRY­SALES TAX RATES. The screen shown next appears.

Sales Tax Rates Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Tax Zone Contains the code assigned to the tax zone.
Tax Rate % Contains the percentage of tax charged in the tax zone.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F5] - Ins Ln Inserts a new line above the line currently selected.
[F6] - Del Line Deletes the line currently selected.
[F7] - Clear Clears all data from the screen.

02/09/10 32
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CUSTOMERS
Customer information is stored in the customer database table. This information
includes things like tax rate, credit limit, credit status, and whether the customer
allows returned concrete. This information can be inserted directly into the Orders or
Projects screens.

To access this table, select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­CUSTOMERS. The screen

shown next appears.

Customers Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Customer Code Unique code assigned to the customer. You may browse
this field to see a list of customers in the database.
Customer Name Full name given to the customer.
Account Number Account number assigned to the customer account. Used
for tracking purposes only - Customer Code is the main
identifier of the customer account.
Account Status Status assigned to the customer account. This is a free form
entry field and is used for informational purposes only. If a
status is entered in this field, it will be pulled onto the
PROJECTS screen when a project is created for this
customer.

02/09/10 33
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Credit Limit Customer’s credit limit. If an order for this customer
exceeds this limit, an error message is displayed at the
bottom of the screen when the order is transferred to the
Batch Setup screen.
User Defined This is a free-form entry field and is used for informational
purposes only.
Account Balance Current customer account balance. System-generated based
on the tickets generated for this customer code.
Tax Zone Tax zone applicable for this customer. This browseable
field must contain an entry from the Sales Tax Rates table.
Returned Concrete Yes or No field that specifies whether returned concrete
Allowed? could be shipped to this customer. Controls all returned
concrete activity for this customer.
C.O.D.? Yes or No field that specifies whether this customer is a
cash or credit customer.
Print Prices? Yes or No field that specifies whether prices will print on
tickets generated for this customer.
Address Address line 1.
Address Address line 2.
P.O. Box P.O. Box number, when applicable.
City City of the customer.
State/County Either the state or county of the customer.
Zip/Postal Code Zip or postal code of the customer.
Contact Name Name of contact person at the customer location.
Phone Number Telephone number of the contact person.
Notes Any notes you wish to attach to the customer account.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F7] - Clear Clears all data from the screen.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the entire record from the database – make sure
this is what you want to do! You are prompted to press
this key again to confirm.

02/09/10 34
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INGREDIENTS
Information about ingredients is stored in the ingredients database table. Ingredients
can be added, edited, and viewed on the INGREDIENTS screen.

To access this screen, select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­INGREDIENTS to view,

add, and maintain ingredients in your inventory. You may also access the
INGREDIENTS screen directly from the MIX DESIGNS screen by pressing [F3] after
accessing MIX DESIGNS. In either case, the following screen appears.

Ingredients Screen – Page 1

Ingredients Screen – Page 2

02/09/10 35
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Code assigned to the ingredient. You may browse this
field to see a list of ingredients in the database.
Description Description of the ingredient (e.g., 3/8” Rock).
Entry The units used on the MIX DESIGNS screen for this
ingredient.
Based On Used only if the amount of this ingredient in a mix is
based on the amount of another ingredient. Usually used
for admix ingredients. Works with the Based On Factor
field of this screen. Valid entries are:
/c – The amount of the ingredient is based on each 100
lb/kg of another ingredient (usually cement).
% - The amount of the ingredient is a percentage of the
amount of another ingredient.
sg – Used for slurry calculations based on the specific
gravity of the slurry and water.
Internal Units in which all internal calculations are done. This unit
should be the least common denominator of all units
entered in the Units section; so, it is usually lb/kg, or fl
oz/ml.
Inventory Unit of measure in which inventory for this ingredient is
displayed.
Purchase Unit of measure in which the ingredient is purchased.
Adjust Unit used to perform the adjustment calculation on the
ingredient. The amount of the ingredient in each load is
changed by the amount entered for the adjustment factor.
This is an absolute amount and is not proportional to the
load size, as in the trim calculation. Usually used only
with water.
Trim Unit used to perform the trim calculation on the
ingredient. The load size is multiplied by the trim factor
to obtain the change in the ingredient amount for the load.
Usually used only with water.
Weight Unit of measure in which the material is weighed, such as
lb or kg.
To Volume Unit of measure for the volume of the ingredient, such as
gallons (gl) or fluid ounces (oz). Mostly for liquids.

02/09/10 36
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Unit Factor Contains the number by which the weight of the
ingredient is multiplied to obtain the volume (i.e., a
conversion factor). This factor is usually used for liquids.
Inventory Enable Yes/No field that enables/disables inventory checking of
this ingredient in the On Hand column of the Inventory
Period screens. Normally, this field is set to Y, except for
waters. This field also enables/disables inventory
checking for mixes and resale products.
Cost Per Cost of the ingredient per Inventory unit of measure.
Decimal Points Number of decimal points that appear on the MIX DESIGN
and BATCH SETUP screens for the ingredient amount.
Modify Flag A Y (yes) value permits you to modify the amount of the
ingredient in the mix design on the BATCH SETUP screen.
An N (no) value prohibits this action.
Print Inventory Unit? When this field is set to Y, the inventory report will print
in inventory units instead of internal units.
Tracepoints? This field determines whether tracepoints are enabled and
recorded in the Error file (for debugging). Options are:
Y – enable Tracepoints.
N – do not enable Tracepoints.
P – (for Performance) enable Tracepoints and provide
more details in the Error file.
Check Negative A Y (yes) value tells the system to report an error if the
Correction? material’s target passes below zero after calculating the
targets on the BATCH SETUP screen.
Minimum Allowed In Minimum amount of the ingredient allowed in a mix
Mix design, based on the Entry unit of measure.
Maximum Allowed In Maximum amount of the ingredient allowed in a mix
Mix design, based on the Entry unit of measure.
Minimum Auto Minimum moisture percentage reading allowed from the
Moisture % probe. Minimum that can be entered manually. Manual
or Automatic.
Maximum Auto Maximum moisture percentage reading allowed from the
Moisture % probe. Maximum that can be entered manually. Manual
or Automatic.

02/09/10 37
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Use Positive Tare? Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Over
field on the SCALES screen. If you enter a Y in this field,
the system accepts any positive tare amount under the
established tolerance. If you enter an N in this field, the
system always uses a zero tare value, even if a positive
weight exists. Example: Tolerance is set at 20 pounds.
Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale registers a 15-
pound positive tare. For a Y value, the system dumps 85
pounds of material onto the scale. For an N value, the
system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale.
Use Over Positive Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Over
Tare? field on the SCALES screen. If you enter a Y in this field,
the system accepts any positive tare amount over the
established tolerance. If you enter an N in this field, the
system always uses a zero tare value, even if a positive
weight exists. Example: Tolerance is set at 20 pounds.
Target weight is 100 pounds. The scale registers a 30-
pound positive tare. For a Y value, the system dumps 70
pounds of material onto the scale. For an N value, the
system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale.
Use Negative Tare? Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Under
field on the SCALES screen. If you enter a Y in this field,
the system accepts any negative tare amount under the
established tolerance. If you enter an N in this field, the
system always uses a zero value, even if a negative weight
exists. Example: Tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target
weight is 100 pounds. The scale registers a 15-pound
negative tare. For a Y value, the system dumps 115
pounds of material onto the scale. For an N value, the
system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale.
Use Under Negative Works in conjunction with the Zero Tolerance Under
Tare? field on the SCALES screen. If you enter a Y in this field,
the system accepts any negative tare amount under the
established tolerance. If you enter an N in this field, the
system always uses a zero value, even if a negative weight
exists. Example: Tolerance is set at -20 pounds. Target
weight is 100 pounds. The scale registers a 30-pound
negative tare. For a Y value, the system dumps 130
pounds of material onto the scale. For an N value, the
system dumps 100 pounds of material onto the scale.

02/09/10 38
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Group Code Attaches the material to the appropriate material group.
Required for new ingredients! Controls colors,
calculations, and batching orders. Standard groups are:
1 AGG, 2 CEM, 3 WAT, 4 ADX, and 5 WATADX.
Auxiliary Group Secondary material group for the ingredient.
Inventory Level N means to display inventory by Bin/Tank/Silo
Y means to display inventory by Plant.
S means to display inventory System Wide.
Ticket Group Attaches the ingredient to a ticket group. This controls
the printing order of the material. For example,
ingredients in the AGG group will print before ingredients
in the ADX group.
Aux2 Group Third material group for the ingredient.
Record SOZ as Normally, this field should be set to N (for No). It should
Batched? only be set to Y (for Yes) in cases where bin or silo gates
do not close all the way, allowing small amounts of
(SOZ means material to leak into the scale between loads. In such
“Scale Over Zero.”) cases, setting this field to Y allows the "leaked" material
to be included in inventory usage for the next load.
Note: This method of compensating for leaking gates
should only be used temporarily. It is preferred
that the gates be repaired.
Based on Factor Used with the Based On field. Tells the system what
factor to use if the target weight of this material is based
on another material. Example: To batch one unit of this
material per 100 weight of cement, enter a 1 in this field.
Effectiveness The system uses this value to determine how much of this
ingredient to actually batch. For example, if you are
batching air that is 100% effective and the target for air is
50 ounces, the system batches 50 ounces. If you are
batching air that is 50% effective and the target for air is
50 ounces, the system batches 100 ounces. This field
accepts values with up to two decimal places (ex: 60.75).
Correction Factor Typically assigned to calcium ingredients and used to
determine water targets. Based on ingredient group type.
Using Calcium as the primary group ingredient and
Water as the secondary group ingredient, the calculation
is as follows: Water = Water – (Calcium * Calcium
Correction Factor) * (Material Calculation Factor).
Numerically this could be presented as Water = 32 gl –
153.6 oz * 1.00 * 1.00. Water then equals 30.8 gl.

02/09/10 39
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Substitution Ratio of this product when it is substituted for another.
Acceptable values range from 1 to 1.2. Example: Target
weight for cement is 500 lb. You want to substitute fly
ash for 10 percent of the cement. However, cement and
fly ash are not a one-to-one substitution. It takes 1.05
units of fly ash to equal 1 unit of cement. The substitution
value for fly ash is 1.05.
Absorption Percentage of moisture above Oven Dry needed to
achieve SSD (Saturated Surface Dry) weight. SSD
moisture can range from 1 to 3% above Oven Dry.
Correction Weighting Applies to groups of ingredients. Example: Hot and cold
water are both used in a mix design. However, correction
needs to be made to water amounts due to the moisture in
the sand. If both the hot and cold-water ingredients have
a correction weighting value of zero, the system adjusts
each amount proportionately based on their target weights
in the mix design. However, if you assign a value of 1 to
cold water and a value of zero to hot water, then the
system makes the adjustments against the cold water.
This is because the cold water is 100 percent of the total
weighting of the two water group ingredients, i.e. 1+0=1
and the value of cold water is 1 which is 100 percent of
the total. The numbers themselves don’t carry any
meaning except the ratio of the total of the entire
ingredient group that they represent. If you want the
correction to the water to be applied 50/50 percent
between hot and cold water, then you could assign a value
of 1 to both ingredients. Because they are both 50 percent
of the 2, the adjustments would be applied at 50 percent
per ingredient. This can work for more than two
ingredients. Everything is still based on proportionate
ratio.
Note: If the system is applying an adjustment to an
ingredient and that ingredient target goes below
zero before the total adjustment is applied, the
system applies the adjustment proportionately to
the remaining ingredient targets in the mix design.
Slump Factor Used for determining the water amount per mix unit
(cubic yard or meter) per 1 inch or 1 mm for slump
calculations. Typically, this value is 1.0 for US systems
and .20 for Metric.

02/09/10 40
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Specific Gravity Specific gravity for the material. Used for calculating the
mix design’s yield on the MIX DESIGNS screen. Also
used in slurry calculations. Quality control personnel
normally provide this number.
Plant Code Default home plant of the current user. This is not
editable.
Over Tolerance % Allowable percentage of over-tolerance amount based on
the entry units for the plant. When calculating over-
tolerance situations, the system uses either the material or
plant over tolerance setting, whichever is greater. This
field instructs the system when to flag the amount.
Under Tolerance % Allowable percentage of under-tolerance amount based on
the entry units for the plant. When calculating under-
tolerance situations, the system uses either the material or
plant under tolerance setting, whichever is greater. This
field instructs the system when to flag the amount.
Finished % Percentage of under- or over-target the system will allow
for batch completion of this ingredient. Typically, this is
one-half the under-tolerance value. Used mainly for
speed in split batching where you would jog to less than
100% of the target. If the system weighs up in fast feed
and has to jog, it jogs to the Finished % short of the
target.
Batch Calculation Tells the system whether to calculate the ingredient on an
Type individual net basis or group cumulative basis based on
the group code of the product. Value is either C
(cumulative) or N (net). The type chosen here must match
the type chosen in the Tolerance Calculation Type field.
Tolerance Calculation Tells the system whether to issue a tolerance error for the
Type ingredient on a net or cumulative basis based on the group
code of the product. Value is either C (cumulative) or N
(net). The type chosen here must match the type chosen
in the Batch Calculation Type field.
Sequence Priority Default is 0. When 0 is used, the sequence priority on the
mix design is used. To globally increase the priority of an
ingredient, assign a number here. The higher the number,
the higher the priority.
PAGE 2 – INGREDIENTS SCREEN
Purchase-Inventory Weight-to-volume factor used for converting purchase
Unit Factor units to inventory units.
Inventory-Internal Weight-to-volume factor used for converting inventory
Unit Factor units to internal calculation units.

02/09/10 41
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Specific Gravity of Specific gravity of the solids in the slurry water. Used for
Slurry Solids slurry calculations. Quality control personnel normally
provide this number.
Small Batch Percentage of the scale/meter capacity below which small
Tolerances batch tolerances are used. If this value is zero, large
(normal) batch tolerances are used.
Over Tolerance Allowable percentage or amount of over-tolerance based
on the entry units for the plant. When calculating over-
tolerance situations, the system uses the smaller of the
percentage or the amount.
Note: For large (normal) tolerance checking, the system
uses the larger of the percentage or amount entries.
Under Tolerance Allowable percentage or amount of under-tolerance based
on the entry units for the plant. When calculating under-
tolerance situations, the system uses the smaller of the
percentage or the amount.
Note: For large (normal) tolerance checking, the system
uses the larger of the percentage or amount entries.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save To save data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse To pull up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Page 2 To go to the second page of this screen.
[F6] - MatCalc To pull up a screen showing setups for all ingredients in the
database. You cannot make any changes on this screen.
[F7] - Clear To cancel changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Delete To delete the Ingredient record currently displayed. When
prompted, press this key again to confirm.

ª INGREDIENT GROUPS

When an ingredient is entered into the Spectrum database, you must assign it to a
“group” in the Group Code field of the INGREDIENTS screen. The system can
then perform calculations based on all ingredients within a group, as opposed to a
different calculation for each ingredient in the database. The Group Code is a
required field when entering a new ingredient. The standard group codes are:

02/09/10 42
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

1 AGG
2 CEM
3 WAT
4 ADX
5 WATADX

IMPORTANT! Always assign ingredients to the proper groups to ensure

proper system calculations and grouping on tickets.

ª ABSOLUTE VALUE INGREDIENTS

“Absolute value” ingredients do not have their mix design target amounts based
on the amount of another ingredient in the mix. Aggregate ingredients usually
fall into this category. To make an ingredient an absolute value ingredient, leave
the Based On and Based On Factor fields blank.

ª PERCENTAGE INGREDIENTS

“Percentage” ingredients do have their mix design target amounts based on the
amount of another ingredient in the mix. This applies mostly to admixes. To
make an ingredient a percentage ingredient, enter % in the Based On field, and a
numeric value in the Based on Factor field.

Example:

Let’s say we entered % in the Based On field, and 28 in the Based On

Factor field for Calcium. The % in the Based On field tells the system to
assume a 1% ratio of Calcium for each 100 pounds of cement. (We already
know that it takes 28 ounces of Calcium to achieve this ratio.) If, however
the mix design calls for 2%, the system targets 56 ounces of Calcium for
each 100 pounds of cement.

NOTE: Calcium is part of the 4 ADX ingredient group. “Based on”

information for ingredients in this group is based on the 2 CEM
group for target calculations.

02/09/10 43
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª HUNDRED WEIGHT INGREDIENTS

“Hundred Weight” ingredients have their mix design target amounts based on
each 100 pounds of cement. To make an ingredient a hundred weight ingredient,
enter /c in the Based On field, and 1 in the Based On Factor field. This means
an admix measured in ounces would have 1 ounce of the admix added for each
100 pounds of cement.

ª INGREDIENT EFFECTIVENESS

In the Effectiveness field of the INGREDIENTS screen, you can enter an

effectiveness value to compensate for varying strengths.

Example: Mix calls for 10 oz. of Air.

• At 100% effectiveness, 10 oz. is used per yard.

• At 90% effectiveness, 11.11 oz. is used per yard. (10 oz. / .90 = 11.11 oz.)

02/09/10 44
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MIX DESIGNS
Information about mix designs (recipes for concrete mixes) is stored in the Mix
Designs database table. Mix Designs can be added, edited, and viewed on the MIX
DESIGNS screen.

To access this screen, select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­MIX DESIGNS to view,

add, and edit mix designs in your database. The following screen appears.

Mix Designs Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Mix Code Code assigned to this mix design. You may browse this
field to see a list of mix designs in the database.
Description The complete name assigned to the mix design.
Ingredients Allows you to select an ingredient from a browseable list of
ingredients. Each ingredient is selected on a separate line.

02/09/10 45
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Absolute Absolute value of this ingredient required to make one unit
(cubic yard or cubic meter) of the mix design.
Note: An entry is required in, either, this field or the Based
On field.
Based On Amount of this ingredient required to make one unit, based
on the amount of another ingredient. The ingredient must
have “based on” information entered on the INGREDIENTS
screen. Actual targets are figured at batch time based on the
setups in the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen.
Note: An entry is required in, either, this field or the
Absolute field.
Yield This ingredient’s portion of the mix design. This value is
derived from the Specific Gravity numbers set up for the
material in the INGREDIENTS screen. This number can
usually be obtained from your local supplier. NOTE: the
total of the yields of all ingredients should equal 27 cubic
feet. Anything other than this signifies an incorrect mix
design.
LMD Read-only field. Last Modified Date. Shows date and user.
This field appears when an existing mix design is selected.
It is not present on the blank Mix Design screen.
Tot Yield: Read-only field. Total yield for all ingredients. Should not
exceed 27 cubic feet (see Yield field above.)
Maximum Maximum load size and unit of measure for the mix design.
Load/Unit Should equal the largest truck size entered on the
BATCHING DEFAULTS screen.
NOTE: Any Load Size on the BATCH SETUP screen greater
than this value causes the system to split-batch the load.
Sequence Code Browseable field that allows you to select the sequence of
events for this mix design. Because a default sequence code
is established in the BATCHING DEFAULTS screen, you only
need to enter a sequence code for the mix design when it
differs from the default. Because of this, the Sequence
Code field is often left blank. Sequence codes are most
often entered for grout mixes and when you have a plant
that is switching between wet and dry batching.
Slump: Default The consistency to which the mix was designed. This value
is pulled onto the BATCH SETUP screen when this mix
design is batched. If Slump Tables are enabled, this value is
ignored (see “Slump Tables” for more information).

02/09/10 46
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Slump: Min The minimum threshold before the water/cement ratio for
the mix is compromised. When batching this mix, if you
enter a slump less than this value, an error occurs and you
will be forced to enter a new slump value.
Slump: Max The maximum threshold before the water/cement ratio for
this mix is compromised. When batching this mix, if you
enter a slump more than this amount, an error occurs and
you will be forced to enter a new slump value.
Air Content Amount of free air trapped in the concrete due to the
gradation of aggregates. This value is typically supplied by
the QC department and is only used for yield calculations.
Mixer Time Minimum amount of time needed for a properly blended
mix. This time determines at what point the load is ready to
dump from the mixer. (For mixer systems only.)
Modify? Allows you to indicate whether the operator is allowed to
modify the mix design on the BATCH SETUP screen at batch
time. If set to N, values cannot be changed before batching.
Mix Type? Either S for SSD weights, D for standard Oven Dry weights,
or O for Minnesota DOT Oven Dry weights. At batch time,
the system converts Oven Dry weights back to SSD
weights.
Mix Class Browseable list of mix classes. Mix classes are entered on
the MIX CLASSES screen found in the SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE menu and are used when returned concrete
is involved. Here’s how it works. Compatible mix designs
are assigned to a particular mix class. By compatible, we
mean a small amount of one mix design could be left in the
truck and combined with another mix design of the same
class with no adverse affects. The QC department usually
defines Mix classes. Only a couple of U.S. states allow
returned concrete to be resold.
Inventory Allows you to indicate whether this mix should be tracked
in the daily inventory logging. If set to N, mix design
inventory will not be kept for this mix, and it will not affect
the daily totals for batches run. A ticket will not be printed
for “no” value loads. (Usually used for washout mix
designs.)
Taxable Indicates whether this mix design is taxable.
List Price Per unit price for the mix design.
Account Number Used for tracking purposes.

02/09/10 47
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Alias Used only when Spectrum is interfaced to a HydroControl
IV moisture control system. In this case, you would enter
the 3-character alias for the mix in this field.
Slump Table Browseable list of slump tables that can be attached to the
mix design. If a slump table is selected here, then standard
linear slump calculations will not be used. (See “Slump
Tables” for more information.)
Consistence This field contains the EN 206 Consistence Class (S1, S2,
etc.) or Slump in millimeters.
Ext. Description This field is a concatenation of information about Strength
Class, Exposure Class, Flow Class, Maximum Aggregate
Size, and Cement Type. For non-EN 206 users, this field
can be blank or used for entering additional information.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

Sh-F4 Return Mix Pulls up a list of Mix Classes so authorized personnel can
Classes select which ones can be accepted as returned concrete
against the mix design currently on the screen. (Mix classes
are entered on the MIX CLASSES screen under SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE.)
Sh-F5 Inventory Pulls up inventory data for the mix design. The number of
units batched, loaded, and resold are displayed for each
inventory period (1=daily, 2=weekly, 3=monthly,
4=yearly).
Sh-F6 Global Mix Pulls up a change box so you can substitute one ingredient
Change for another in all mixes. (See “To Change an Ingredient in
All Mixes” later in this section.)
[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Ingred Shortcut to the INGREDIENTS screen.
[F4] - Convert Displays the ingredient units of measure in the alternate
units of measure (US or Metric). This function is useful if
you want to create the same mix design in the alternate unit
of measure.
Note: The system still batches the mix in the original units.
[F5] - Insert Inserts a line (in the Ingredients section). The new line is
inserted above the line currently selected.

02/09/10 48
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

[F6] - Del Line Deletes a line (in the Ingredients section). The line
currently selected is deleted.
[F7] - Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the mix design currently displayed. When
prompted, press this key again to confirm.

02/09/10 49
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª TO CREATE A MIX DESIGN

1. Access the MIX DESIGNS screen.

2. In the Mix Code field, type the code for the mix design you are creating.
3. Press [ENTER] to move to the Description field and type the full name of the
mix design.
4. Press [ENTER] to move to the Ingredients section.

NOTE: Before adding ingredients, you must determine the order in which
ingredients are to be batched for this mix. The system batches
ingredients in the order they are listed on the MIX DESIGNS screen
(from top to bottom). Ingredients should be listed in the following
order in a mix design: (1) Aggregates; (2) Cement; (3) Water; (4)
Admixes.

5. Type the code for the first ingredient on the top line of the Ingredients section.
You can browse a list of ingredients by pressing [F2]. Then highlight the
desired ingredient and press [ENTER] to insert the ingredient into this field.
6. Press [ENTER] to move to the Absolute field. If the ingredient is an
“Absolute Value” ingredient (e.g., an aggregate), type the absolute value per
cubic yard (or meter) in this field and press [ENTER] to enter the next
ingredient.
If the ingredient is a “Based On” ingredient, leave the Absolute field blank
and press [ENTER] to move to the Based On field.
7. In the Based On field, type the numeric value you wish to associate with this
“Based On” ingredient. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the next
ingredient line.

NOTES: For “Based On” ingredients, either % or /c is displayed in this field

(% for percentage-based, /c for hundred weight-based).
This field is not accessible for “Absolute Value” ingredients. The
cursor moves to the next ingredient line instead.

8. Continue adding ingredients in the order you want them batched.

The Yield field displays a number for each ingredient added. This number is
derived from the Specific Gravity field of the INGREDIENTS screen
multiplied by the amount of the ingredient in the mix design. When you have
added all ingredients to the mix design, the Total Yield field value should be
approximately 27. See your QC person for more information about yields.
9. Complete the fields on the right side of the screen (see the previous table for
definitions of these fields). Press ]F1] to save the new mix design record.

02/09/10 50
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª TO CHANGE AN INGREDIENT IN ALL MIXES

1. Make sure the ingredient has been added to the database (see “ Ingredients” in
this manual).
2. From the MIX DESIGNS screen, press [SHIFT + F6] to pull up the following
change box. The cursor is in the “From” field.

Global Material Change Box

3. Press [F2] to browse for the ingredient to be changed. Highlight the

ingredient and press [ENTER] to enter it in this field. The cursor moves to
the “To” field.
4. Press [F2] to browse for the ingredient to change to. Highlight the ingredient
and press [ENTER] to enter it in this field.
5. Press [F1] to initiate the global change process. All occurrences of the
“From” ingredient are replaced with the “To” ingredient.

ª TO VIEW USAGE FOR A “SINGLE” MIX DESIGN

NOTE: The Inventory? field on the Mix Designs screen must be set to Y if you
want to track inventory for the mix.

1. Access the MIX DESIGNS screen.

2. In the Mix Code field, type the code for the mix design whose usage data you
wish to view.
3. Press [SHIFT + F5] to pull up inventory data for this particular mix design.
An example is shown next.

Batched Loads Resold

1 35.00 7 0.00
2 175.00 35 0.00
3 700.00 140 0.00
4 700.00 140 0.00

02/09/10 51
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

• The numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent inventory periods for the current

day, the current week, the current month, and the current year,
respectively.
• For each inventory period, the number of units and loads batched are
shown. Also the number of units resold is displayed.

ª TO VIEW USAGE FOR “ALL” MIX DESIGNS

Select MAIN MENU­REPORTS­MIX DESIGN LISTING and press [ENTER].

The Mix Design Listing is generated and sent to the printer (or to a file if this was
specified on the PLANTS screen).

02/09/10 52
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ADMIX DESIGNS
Information about admix designs is stored in the Admix Designs database table.
Admix Designs are a convenient way to add seasonal ingredients such as calcium on
an “as needed” basis to an order. Admix Designs can be added, edited, and viewed
on the ADMIX DESIGNS screen.

To access this screen, select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ADMIX DESIGNS to view,

add, and edit admix designs in your database. The following screen appears.

Admix Designs Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Admix Code Code assigned to the admix design. You may browse this
field to see a list of admix designs in the database.
Description The complete name assigned to the admix design.
Ingredients Allows you to select an ingredient from a browseable list of
ingredients. Each ingredient is selected on a separate line.
Absolute Absolute value of the ingredient required to make one unit
(cubic yard or cubic meter) of the admix design.
Based On Amount of this ingredient required to make one unit, based
on the amount of another ingredient. The ingredient must
have “based on” information entered on the INGREDIENTS
screen. Actual targets are figured at batch time based on the
setups in the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen.

02/09/10 53
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Sale Unit This field is not editable. It contains the default batching
unit of measure for your system. You can press [F4] to
toggle between U.S. Standard and Metric measurements.
Quantity Type Default quantity to be targeted when a load with this admix
design is batched. The options are:
B (balance) – causes the product quantity to be set to zero
when quantity ordered = quantity delivered.
F (flat rate) - causes the product quantity to be
automatically set to “1” on the Batch Setup screen.
M (mix based) – causes the quantity of the admix to match
the quantity of the main mix design on the Batch Setup
screen.
Taxable Indicates whether this admix design is taxable.
List Price Per unit price for the admix design.
Account Number Used for tracking purposes.
Last Modified Read-only fields that show the last date the record was
by modified and by which user.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Ingred Shortcut to the INGREDIENTS screen.
[F4] - Convert Converts the ingredients units of measure from U.S.
Standard to Metric and vice versa.
[F5] - Insert Inserts a line (in the Ingredients section). The new line is
inserted above the line currently selected.
[F6] - Del Line Deletes a line (in the Ingredients section). The line
currently selected is deleted.
[F7] - Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the mix design currently displayed. When
prompted, press this key again to confirm.

02/09/10 54
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TO CREATE AN ADMIX DESIGN

1. Access the ADMIX DESIGNS screen.

2. In the Admix Code field, type the code for the mix design you are creating.
3. Press [ENTER] to move to the Description field and type the full name of the
admix design.
4. Press [ENTER] to move to the Ingredients section.

NOTE: Typically, only one admix is entered. If, however, more than one
ingredient is entered, the order in which the ingredients are listed is
important. The system batches ingredients in the order they are listed
on the ADMIX DESIGNS screen (from top to bottom).

5. Type the code for the first ingredient on the top line of the Ingredients
section. Or, browse the ingredients list, highlight the desired ingredient and
press [ENTER] to insert the ingredient into this field.
6. Press [ENTER] to move to the Absolute field. If the ingredient is an
“Absolute Value” ingredient, type the absolute value per cubic yard in this
field and press [ENTER] to enter the next ingredient.
If the ingredient is a “Based On” ingredient, leave this field blank and press
[ENTER] to move to the Based On field.
7. In the Based On field, type the numeric value you wish to associate with this
“Based On” ingredient. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the next
ingredient line.

NOTES: For “Based On” ingredients, either % or /c is displayed in this field

(% for percentage-based, /c for hundred weight-based).
This field is not accessible for “Absolute Value” ingredients. The
cursor moves to the next ingredient line instead.

8. Continue adding ingredients in the order you want them batched.

9. Complete the fields on the right side of the screen (see the previous table for
definitions of these fields). Press [F1] to save the new admix design record.

02/09/10 55
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ULINK-STYLE ADMIX MODIFIERS

If you receive mix designs from a dispatch computer via the Universal Link (Ulink),
you can enter Ulink-style admix modifiers as admix designs. This kind of admix
design is given a specific name so that it corresponds to a particular Ulink field (i.e.
admix code ULINK_092 would correspond to Ulink field 092).

The following list shows the names that must be entered as the admix code, along
with their corresponding Ulink fields and descriptions. (See the section titled “To
Create an Admix Design” for more information.)

Spectrum Ulink Field Description Type/Max Format Replace

Admix Name or
Modify
ULINK_092 092 % Calcium Num/4 N.NN Replace
ULINK_093 093 % Air Num/3 NNN Apply as
Entrainment percent to
modify
ULINK_094 094 % Super Num/3 NNN Apply as
Plasticizer percent to
modify
ULINK_095 095 % Hot Water Num/3 NNN Apply as
percent to
modify
ULINK_096 096 Pounds of Ice Num/4 NNNN Replace

Note: In Spectrum, you do not have to put a calcium ingredient in ULINK_092, nor
an air entrainment ingredient in ULINK_093, etc.

A Ulink-style admix design contains all of the materials that can be modified. When
a value is sent in the corresponding Ulink field, the amounts associated with the
material names in the admix design that match materials in the main mix are either
modified (multiplied as a percentage) or replaced by the value in the Ulink field.

Example:
The dispatching computer sends a ticket with a value in Ulink field 092. Ulink looks
for a Spectrum admix design named ULINK_092. If the admix design is found and it
contains one or more of the materials used in the main mix, the value sent in Ulink
field 092 replaces the amounts of these materials in the main mix.

02/09/10 56
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

RESALE PRODUCTS
Resale products include items such as rebar, fiber mesh, sand, and gloves. These
items are sold along with concrete, meaning they are included on the order. Resale
products can be added to an order any time before the order is batched, but the best
time to enter them is when the order is first entered.

Information about resale products is stored in the Resale Products database table.
Resale products are added and edited on the RESALE PRODUCTS screen . To access
this screen, select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­RESALE PRODUCTS.

Resale Products Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Code assigned to the resale product. You may browse this
field to see a list of resale products in the database.
Ingredient Alias (Used only when an ingredient is used as a resale product.)
Browseable list of ingredients. (See “Ingredients Used as
Resale Products” for more information.)
Description Full name given to the resale product.
Plant Plant code. You may browse this field to choose another
plant.
Account Number Account number assigned to the product. Defaults to the
resale product code.

02/09/10 57
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Quantity Type Default quantity when the product is sold. The options are:
B (balance)– causes the product quantity to be set to zero
when quantity ordered = quantity delivered.
F (flat rate) - causes the product quantity to be
automatically set to “1” in the order.
M (mix based)– causes the quantity of the resale product to
match the quantity of the main mix design on the BATCH
SETUP screen.
Taxable Indicates whether the product is taxable.
Auto Add? Controls the automatic addition of this product to orders:
• N – Product is not automatically added to an order.
• A – Product is automatically added to all orders.
• W – Product is automatically added to all orders during
the winter season.*
• S – Product is automatically added to all orders during
the summer season.*
* Date ranges are set on the SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen
of the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MENU.
• O – Product is added if ordered amount is less than the
indicated threshold.
• L – Product is added if the load size amount is less than
the indicated threshold.
Threshold Works in conjunction with the Auto Add? field when that
field contains an “O” or “L” value. Determines minimum
order and minimum load size charges.
List Price Per unit sale price for the product.
Inventory Enable? To display inventory data on the bottom portion of the
screen, you must set this field to Y (yes). (Must also be set
to Y if you use ingredients as resale products.)
Decimal Points Number of decimal places to show in the inventory amounts
at the bottom of the screen.
Deduct from (Used only when an ingredient is used as a resale product.)
Ingredient? Must be set to Y in this case.
Internal Unit Default unit of measure for the product.
Sale Unit Unit of measure in which the product is sold.
Sale/Internal Unit Conversion factor for converting the Sale Unit to the
Factor Internal Unit.
Inventory Unit Unit of measure in which inventory for the product is to be
displayed.

02/09/10 58
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Inventory-Internal Conversion factor for converting the Inventory Unit to the
Unit Factor Internal Unit. Expressed as a weight/volume.
Purchase Unit Unit of measure in which the product is to be received.
Purchase-Inventory Conversion factor for converting the Purchase Unit to the
Unit Factor Inventory Unit. Expressed as a weight/volume.
On Hand Current on hand balance of the product. Both the inventory
and sale unit information is displayed.
Inventory Periods There are four inventory periods displayed: (1) Day, (2)
Week, (3) Month, and (4) Year. Total inventory and sale
units are displayed for each inventory period.

NOTE: To view a list of all resale products, select MAIN MENU­REPORTS

­RESALE PRODUCT LISTING and press [ENTER]. The list is
generated and sent to the printer (or to a file if this was specified on the
PLANTS screen). A sample of this report is shown in the “Reports”
section of this guide.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Incoming When a resale product is displayed, press this key to pull up
the Incoming Inventory box so you can receive the product.
(See “Recording Incoming Inventory – Resale Products”
for more information about receiving inventory.)
[F7] - Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the product record currently displayed. When
prompted, press this key again to confirm.

02/09/10 59
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª INGREDIENTS USED AS RESALE PRODUCTS

For customers who use ingredients as resale products, resale usage can be deducted
from the corresponding ingredient’s inventory when the ticket is generated.

In order for this feature to work:

• The Inventory Level field of the Ingredients screen must be set to Y (By
Plant) or S (System Wide) for each ingredient used as a resale product.

• The Inventory Enable and Deduct from Ingredient fields of the Resale
Products screen must be set to Y, and an ingredient must be selected in the
Ingredient Alias field.

When a batch with the resale product is run, the system deducts the resale amount
from the alias ingredient’s on-hand amount. The Resale Products Listing and the
Resale Product Inventory Report (not shown) will not display an amount for the
ingredient used as the resale product. Rather, they will display an asterisk (*)
followed by the alias ingredient name in the On-Hand column.

===============================================================================
Monday, March 20, 2000 15:16 PAGE 1

*** RESALE ***

*** PRODUCTS LISTING ***

===============================================================================

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION LIST PRICE ON-HAND

---------- ------------------------------------ ------------- ---------------

519 WASHOUT CHARGE 25.00/ 0

516 HEATED MATERIALS CHARGE 7.00/ 156
512 FIBER MESH 0.00/ 125
510 SUPER PLASTICIZER 0.00/ 308
505 OVERTIME CHARGE 60.00/ 84
0532 CONVEYOR CHARGE 0.00/ 524,288
SANDRESALE SAND SOLD SEPARATELY 0.25/lb * SAND TCG
(*) denotes that the on-hand amount for the product is tracked in the
ingredient displayed.

* * * END OF REPORT * * *

02/09/10 60
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª RECORDING INCOMING INVENTORY – RESALE PRODUCTS

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­RESALE PRODUCTS.

2. In the Code field, select the product for which you wish to record incoming
inventory.
3. Press [F3] – Incoming. The window shown next appears with the cursor on
the Adjustment Amount field.

Incoming Inventory Window

4. Enter the amount of incoming inventory and any other pertinent information
(supplier, truck, hauler, etc.).
5. Press [F1] to save your entry and update this product’s on-hand amount.
6. Press [ESC] to go back to the RESALE PRODUCTS screen. Repeat Steps 2
through 5 above for each product for which you need to receive inventory.

02/09/10 61
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TRUCKS
Information about trucks used to deliver concrete is stored in the Trucks database
table. This information is added, edited, and viewed on the TRUCKS screen. To
access this screen, select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­TRUCKS.

Truck Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Code assigned to the truck. You may browse this field to
see a list of resale products in the database.
Driver Name of driver assigned to the truck.
Hauler Name of the hauler if the truck is not company-owned, but
rented or leased.
Charge Rate % Percentage rate at which concrete should be discharged into
the truck.
Capacity Maximum number of units the truck can haul.
Home Plant Plant code of the “home plant” for the truck.
In Use? Y means the truck is available. N means the truck is not
available (i.e. in the shop for repairs) and cannot be called
up on the BATCH SETUP screen.

02/09/10 62
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Truck Type Browseable field that may contain one of the following
values:
• N – Normal ready mix truck
• C – Conveyor truck
• F – Front discharging truck.
Description Description of the truck.
License Plate License plate number of the truck.
Expiration Date Expiration date of the truck’s license plates.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F7] - Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the truck record currently displayed. When
prompted, press this key again to confirm.

02/09/10 63
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

PROJECTS
Information about projects is stored in the Projects database table. Projects are added
and edited on the PROJECTS screen. To access this screen, select MAIN
MENU­DATA ENTRY­PROJECTS.

Project Screen

Each project record includes the products, pricing, and projected quantities associated
with a particular “quote.” A quote is associated with a particular customer and may
involve a large project that takes several orders to complete.

In this regard, the Projects database is a great time saver. Project information (which
includes customer information) can be called up (by project code) and automatically
inserted into each order, thus saving a lot of typing.

02/09/10 64
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELDS

NOTE: Many of the fields on the PROJECTS screen are automatically populated
when the customer code is entered. These default values can be
changed, however.

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Customer Code Customer code associated with the project. Required field!
Project Code Code assigned to the project.
Name Name assigned to the project.
Notes Delivery notes for the project
Status A browseable field that contains the status of the quote.
Valid entries are:
• N – Normal (firm)
• C – Cancelled (deletes all totals)
• E – Ended (keeps delivered totals)
• H – Held
• W – Will Call

Addr Delivery address for the project.

Account Number Account number of the customer attached to the project.
The name of the customer is displayed directly above this
field.
Account Status Account status assigned to the customer attached to the
project.
Contact Contact name from the customer record for the customer
attached to the project.
Phone Number Contact telephone number from the customer record for the
customer attached to the project.
Order PO Indicator from the customer record that stipulates whether a
Required? Purchase Order is required for all orders.
Restrict Products? Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if product
deviation is allowed when a project is assigned to an order.
C.O.D.? Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if the
customer is a credit or cash customer.
Print Prices? Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if prices
will be printed on delivery tickets.

02/09/10 65
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Return Mix Indicator from the customer record that stipulates if the
Allowed? customer will accept returned concrete.
NOTE:
If the Override Enabled field on the SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE­SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen is set to N, the
system uses the Returned Concrete flag from the customer
record. If, however, the Override Enabled field is set to Y,
you can override the Returned Concrete flag at batch time.
P.O.# P.O. number that should be assigned to all orders in the
project.
UDF 1 This user-defined field may contain up to 20 characters.
The field label is also user-defined (on the SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE­SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen).
UDF 2 This user-defined field may contain up to 20 characters.
The field label is also user-defined (on the SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE­SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen).
UDF 3 This user-defined field may contain up to 20 characters.
The field label is also user-defined (on the SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE­SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen).
Tax Zone Tax zone from the customer record for the customer
attached to the project.
End Date Expiration date of the project.
Last Date Last date this project was assigned to an order and ticketed.
Mix Mix design quoted for the project. You can also enter resale
products here.
Projected Number of units projected to complete the project for each
product.
Delivered System-generated sum of the number of units delivered for
each product.
Slump Default slump assigned to each mix design.
Description Description of each product.

02/09/10 66
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F4] - Pricing Displays the pricing for each product on the project. You
cannot change pricing through this function.
[F5] - Discount Pulls up a window so you can make pricing and discount
changes to products on the project. You can also add or
edit Consistence and Extended Description information
(required for EN 206 users).
[F6] - Cancel Shortcut key that enters C (for cancelled quote) in the
Status field.
[F7] - Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the project record currently displayed. When
prompted, press this key again to confirm.

ª PROJECT PRICING
Spectrum allows you to record custom pricing and/or discounts for any product
specified in a project. To Adjust product pricing:
1. Access or create the project.
2. Add the product(s) to the project.
3. Highlight the product for which you wish to set/adjust pricing.
4. Press [F5] - Discount. As shown next, the Discount/Pricing window appears
with the product code and projected quantity displayed at the top. (This
information is used to calculate the projected total.)

Discount/Pricing Window

02/09/10 67
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

To apply a discount per unit:

5. On the Discount is line Enter either the dollars-per-unit or the percentage and
press [ENTER]. If you enter dollars-per-unit, the system calculates the
percentage. Similarly, if you enter percentage, the dollars-per-unit value is
calculated.

To change the list price:

6. On the List Price line, enter the desired list price over the existing list price
and press [ENTER]. The system calculates new prices.

NOTE: You are not limited to either changing the list price or giving a
discount. You may do both.
7. Press [F1] to save the record. Repeat the process for each product for which
you wish to set/adjust pricing.

ª CONSISTENCE AND EXT. DESCRIPTION

The Consistence and Ext. Desc. Fields on the Discount screen (accessed by pressing
[F5]) describe concrete production in terminology required by the EN 206 Standards.
This information defaults in from the Mix Design record.

To edit or change EN-206 information:

1. Access or create the project.
2. Add a mix to the project, or select the one you want to edit.
3. Press [F5] - Discount. The Discount/Pricing window appears.
4. Edit the Consistence and Ext. Desc. fields as needed.
5. Press [F1] to save the record.

02/09/10 68
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

EDIT MMM DESCRIPTION

This function lets you add descriptions or comments to the Manual Material Event
Log, which is a record of all materials manually batched. You can also tell the
system not to deduct the manually batched material from inventory. To do this, set
Deduct amount from inventory? to N.

To access the MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR EVENT LOG DESCRIPTION EDITOR:

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­EDIT MMM DESCRIPTION. The

following screen appears with the cursor on the Event Date field.

Manual Material Event Log Description Editor

2. Press [F2] to browse a list of dates. Select the date for which you wish to edit
manual event information and press [ENTER].
3. Move to the Event ID field and press [F2] to browse a list of manual events
for the selected date. Press [ENTER]. The appropriate manual event
information appears on the screen.
4. If you do not want this material deducted from inventory, tab down to the
Deduct amount from inventory? field and enter N. Otherwise, leave this
field set to Y, the default setting. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the
blank comments section.
5. Enter comments if needed then press [F1] to save the data.

Timesaver: To cause this screen to always appear when the End of Day
process is run (and there are manual events to edit), set the Edit
MM Description field of the END OF DAY SETUP screen to Y.

02/09/10 69
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SLUMP TABLES

ª WHAT IS SLUMP?

Slump is defined as the number of inches (or millimeters) concrete will sag, or slump,
when a cone filled with the concrete is turned upside down and the cone pulled off
the concrete. Spectrum is capable of adjusting the slump of each load of concrete to
meet the needs of customers, especially when those needs are subject to state and
governmental requirements.

ª SLUMP CALCULATIONS - SIMPLIFIED

There are several ways in Spectrum to adjust the slump of a load of concrete.
• You can enter a default slump value for a mix (on the Mix Designs screen), and
this value will be used whenever the mix is used in a batch.

• On the Batch Setup screen, you can adjust the default slump of a mix at batch
time.

• On the Batching Defaults screen, you can enter a plant-wide default slump value
to be automatically entered whenever you create a mix design.

• You can use “slump tables” to vary how much water is added or subtracted for
each increment of change specified in the slump table.

Standard Slump Calculations. Standard slump calculations use a linear method of

adjusting slump. For each inch (or 25 mm) that you add to or subtract from the slump
value, the system adds or subtracts one gallon (or 5 L) of water per cubic yard (or
meter) of concrete. Whether you adjust the slump one inch (25 mm) or three inches
(75mm), one gallon (5 L) is still added or subtracted for each inch (25 mm) of
change.

Slump Tables. Using Slump Tables, you can vary how much water is added or
subtracted for each inch (25 mm) of change in slump. In other words, if you want to
add 3 inches to the slump, you can create a slump table that will add one gallon for
the first inch and lesser amounts for the second and third inches. This method of
slump adjustment can help ensure that your mix will not come out too wet or too dry
by allowing you to customize each change in slump step.

02/09/10 70
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

A slump table can be attached to more than one mix design, or you can create a slump
table for each mix design. You can also create a “default slump table” and select it
on the Batching Defaults screen. This table will then be used if Slump Tables are
enabled (on the Batching Defaults screen) but no slump table has been attached to the
mix design.

Sample slump tables are shown next (one using US units, the other using Metric).

Slump Table Using US Units

Slump Table Using Metric Units

02/09/10 71
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

A description of each column on the Slump Table is given in the following table.

Column Description
Slump Change The different amounts of slump typically used for
concrete mix designs. This information is read-only.
Percent Adjustment per This is the only column you can edit on this table. It
Step contains the percentage of change in water needed to
achieve the Slump Change in column 1.
Amount of Change per Shows the amount of change for each step (slump
Step change value) resulting from the percentage entered in
column 2. This information is read-only and is shown
in gl for U.S. systems and L for SI.
Cumulative Change per Shows the total changes made against each step
Step (slump change value). This information is read-only
and is shown in gl for U.S. systems and L for SI.

ª SETTING UP SLUMP TABLES

1. To use slump tables instead of the linear method of adjusting slump, select MAIN
MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­BATCHING DEFAULTS and enter Y in the
Enable Slump Table? field. Press [F1] to save your data.
2. Select Main Menu­Data Entry­Slump Table to access the Slump Table
editing screen (shown above).
3. Enter a Slump Code and Description.
4. In the Percent Adjustment per Step column, enter the percentage of change
desired for each increment (or “step) of change. It is recommended that you set
up your tables something like the example given above.
5. Press [F1] to save your data.

02/09/10 72
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª CALCULATING SLUMP USING SLUMP TABLES

Water to Add/Subtract = Water Amt per Mix Unit * Sum of Percentages / 100

Where: The percentages for each step used are added. *

Water Amount per Mix Unit is typically
1.0 gl/yd for US systems **
Water Amount per Mix Unit is typically
5.0 L/m3 for Metric systems ***

* Example: To go from a default 3-inch slump to a 5-inch slump

using the slump table above, two steps amounting to a two-
inch change would be involved. We would add 100 percent
for the 1-inch step to the 80 percent for the 2-inch step,
resulting in a sum of 180.

** Calculated by multiplying change per step (1 inch) by the

Slump Factor for water (1.0 gl/in from Ingredients screen).

*** Calculated by multiplying change per step (25 mm) by the

Slump Factor for water (.20 L/mm from Ingredients screen).

Example 1: Default slump is 3” and we want a 5” slump. We would be adding 2” of

slump. Using our US slump table (and starting from the “Default” row), we
can see that two steps would be involved (the 1” step and the 2” one).
Water to Add = Water Amt per Mix Unit * Sum of Percentages / 100
Water to Add = [100 (for 1” step) + 80 (for 2” step)] * 1.0 / 100
= 180 * 1.0 / 100
= 1.8 gl

Example 2: Default slump is 75mm and we want a 125mm slump. We would be adding
50mm of slump. Using our Metric slump table (and starting from the “Default”
row), we can see that two steps would be used (the 25mm step and the 50mm
one).
Water to Add = Water Amt per Mix Unit * Sum of Percentages / 100
Water to Add = [100 (for 25mm step) + 80 (for 50mm step)] * 5.0 / 100
= 180 * 5.0 / 100
= 180 * .05
= 9.0 L

02/09/10 73
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Example 3: Default slump is 75mm and we want a 25mm slump. We would be subtracting
50mm of slump. Using our Metric slump table (and starting from the “Default”
row), we can see that two steps would be used (the -25mm step and the -50mm
one).
Water to Add = Water Amt per Mix Unit * Sum of Percentages / 100
Water to Add = [-100 (for -25mm step) + -150 (for -50mm step)] * 5.0 / 100
= -250 * 5.0 / 100
= -250 * .05
= -12.5 L

02/09/10 74
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CONFIGURING PLANT DEVICES

Plant devices can be configured through screens accessed from the PLANT SETUP
menu. This is an important part of the installation process because there is a lot
of fine-tuning that takes place. Critical parameters that control material feeding
and discharge are entered on these screens. In addition to these parameters,
Input/Output points are also assigned for each device.

NOTE: Make sure you have added ingredients before you configure devices
through the Plant Setup screens.

Plant Setup Menu

02/09/10 75
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BINS SCREEN
Bins and silos must be set up before you can assign materials or destinations to them.
On the BINS screen (2 pages shown next), you can add a bin, or edit parameters for an
existing one. A description of each field on this screen is given after that.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, or [F5] to
go to the Material Assignments screen.

Bins Screen – Page 1

Bins Screen – Page 2

02/09/10 76
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
(PAGE 1 – BINS SCREEN)
Code Browseable field containing a list of available bins.
Material Read-only field showing the material assigned to this bin.
If this is the first time this bin has been configured, this
field would be blank. (Materials are assigned to bins on
the MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS screen.)
Monitor Enabled? Yes/No field that allows/disallows manual feeding of this
material to be tracked and recorded.
Feed Rate Rate of material flow through the primary gate. In the
above example, the feed rate is 800 lb/sec.
Keyboard Hold Browseable field containing a list of function keys. The
one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this
device from discharging.
Display Group Browseable field containing a list of group color numbers
in which to display this device on the Graph screen.
These color numbers correspond to the colors selected
for the Graph screen on the Batching Defaults screen.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field that activates/deactivates freewheeling for
this device.
Disable Drop Records? Yes/No field that allows you to disable the dropping of
records for the computer’s “learning” process.
FAST FEED
Allow Fast Feed? Yes/No field that allows/prevents fast feed for this
device.
Auger Feed? This field should be set to “Y” if fast feed should only
occur once during the feed cycle. If this field is set to
“N,” multiple fast feeds can occur.
Allow Negative Yes/No field that allows/prevents negative preact values
Preact? to be used in preact calculations. This is used mostly for
pressurized cement feed systems where air pressure
exerts force on the scale, causing the scale to read an
amount higher than what is actually on the scale.
Default Preact Preact value used by the computer when it first starts
automatically adjusting the preact. If there is a non-zero
value in the Preact Override field, however, that value
is used instead of the one calculated by the computer.

02/09/10 77
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Preact Override Any non-zero amount entered here is used as the preact
instead of what is calculated by the computer.
Plant Erraticness This value takes into account variations in accuracy for
fast feed. It works with the Feed Rate and Preact to shut
the gate early. This amount is normally two scale
graduations.
Minimum to Fast Feed Fast Feed begins if Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and
the Safe Target is greater than the Minimum to Fast Feed
value. (See “Feed Types” for more information about
the “Safe Target”.)
Extra Gate Shutoff The point at which all gates, except the main gate, are
closed to avoid overshooting the target. During Fast
Feed, all gates on all bins containing the material being
fed are opened. When the scale weight equals (Target –
Extra Gate Shutoff – Preact – Plant Erraticness), all gates
are closed.
Fast Batch Tolerance All batches of a multi-batch load, except for the last
batch, use the larger of this value and of the absolute and
percentage tolerances from the Ingredients screen. The
last batch uses only the tolerances from the Ingredients
screen.
TIMED FEED
Allow Timed Feed? Yes/No field that allows/prevents timed feed.
Maximum Number of Maximum number of timed feeds the system can attempt
Timed Feeds on one batch.
Plant Erraticness This value takes into account variations in accuracy for
% or lb Timed Feed calculations. If both a percentage (%) and
an amount (lb) are entered, the system uses the greater of
the two.
Minimum to Time If Timed Feed is enabled and the amount left to feed is
Feed greater than the Minimum to Time Feed value, the
system searches the previous Drop History for buckets*
within + or – 20% of the amount left to feed and
calculates a time duration to open the gate based on the
found information.
* A “bucket” is a weight range of previous drop records
used for calculating the current drop time or preact. If
drop records are disabled, either the Default Preact or
Preact Override value is used.
Moisture Probe (Y/N) Yes/No field that indicates whether a moisture probe is
installed in this device.

02/09/10 78
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Hold Feed Browseable field of I/O points for the gate hold limit
switch. Automatically shuts the gate if a problem is
detected by the system.
Gate Closed Browseable field of I/O points for the gate close limit
switch.
Gate 1 Browseable field of I/O points for Gate 1.
Gate 2 Browseable field of I/O points for Gate 2.
Gate 3 Browseable field of I/O points for Gate 3.
Gate Close Browseable field of I/O points for the gate close output.
Vibrator Browseable field of I/O points for the vibrator output.
JOG FEED
Allow Jog? Yes/No field that enables/disables jogs, which are the
smallest units in which material can be fed.
Maximum Number of Maximum number of times the system will jog the gate
Jogs open.
Jog Weight Amount of material that will fall when the gate is opened
for the Jog Time duration. Normally set to one scale
graduation.
Jog Settle Time Length of time the gate should stay closed between jogs
to allow the scale to settle. Normally set at one second.
Jog Time Length of time for the gate to feed the Jog Weight of
material. Must be greater than 20ms and less than 2
seconds. Automatically adjusted by the computer, using
the Jog Time Adjust value.
Jog Time Override A non-zero value in this field overrides the Jog Time
value and opens the gate for this length of time for each
jog. NOTE: Use this with caution! The Jog Time is a
learned value.
Jog Time Adjust This time is added to or subtracted from the Jog Time to
produce a new Jog Time so the next jog can attempt to
achieve the Jog Weight.

02/09/10 79
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
(PAGE 2 – BINS SCREEN)
Flow Control Yes/No field that allows/disallows the system to open
Enabled? and close the gate to maintain a constant flow rate. If
this field is set to “N,” the system opens the gate all the
way, then closes it once loading is done.
Time between Flow Length of time between the computer’s flow rate
Calculations calculations.
Maximum Flow Rate Maximum flow rate allowed in scale units per second.
Minimum Flow Rate Minimum flow rate allowed in scale units per second.
Start Delay Number of seconds to wait before feeding or discharging
actually starts.
Flow Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits after loading
has begun to check the flow rate. This is necessary
because the flow rate is erratic at the start of a load.
Open Time at Start Length of time, in seconds, the gate should be opened at
the start of the loading the truck or mixer to get the
material flowing.
Close Time at Start Duration of the gate close output pulse.
Open Adjust Pulse Length of time, in seconds, the gate opens to keep the
material flow rate constant.
Close Adjust Pulse Length of time, in seconds, the gate closes to keep the
material flow rate constant.
Max Gate Close Time Duration of the gate close output pulse.
Gate Close Forced? Yes/No field. Forces gate closed before feeding starts
from this bin. If “Yes,” the gate close time must expire
before the scale will be used.
Vibrator On If Flow When the flow rate slows down to this rate, the vibrator
Below is activated.
Serial Probe Port This field is used when a moisture probe is attached as an
external serial device.

02/09/10 80
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FEED CONFIGURATIONS

Bins and silos can be configured to feed at different rates based on the amount of
material left to feed and other bin settings. These “feed configurations” take
advantage of Spectrum’s “feed types” described next.

FEED TYPES

In general, the system attempts, first, to Fast Feed then Time Feed and, finally, Jog
Feed to arrive as close as possible to the requested Target. During each “feed type,”
the system makes calculations based on parameters and previously learned
information for the feed type.

³ FAST FEED

Before Fast Feed starts, a “Safe Target” is calculated by adding the requested Target
to the Scale Start Tare then subtracting the Fast Feed Plant Erraticness and Preact
values. The Safe Target is less than the requested Target, so that fast feeding does
not overshoot the requested Target.

Note: If no Preact Overide is set and a learned Preact is not available, the Default
Preact value is used.

Fast Feed begins if Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and the Safe Target is greater than
the Minimum to Fast Feed value. Initially, Fast Feed conditionality opens two gates
and continuously monitors the scale for the amount left to feed. When the amount
left to feed reaches the Extra Gate Shutoff value (if enabled), the second gate is
closed. The first gate is closed when the Safe Target value is reached.

Note: When a feed’s Safe Target is less than the Minimum to Fast Feed value, Fast
Feed is skipped and the system goes directly to Timed Feed.

³ TIMED FEED

Timed Feed is a timed opening of a single gate for a time duration based on the
previous Flow Rates for the bin and material. If Timed Feed is enabled and the
amount left to feed is greater than the Minimum to Time Feed value, the system
calculates a time duration to open the gate based on the found information.

* A “bucket” is a weight range of previous drop records used for calculating the
current drop time or preact. If drop records are disabled, either the Default Preact or
Preact Override value is used.

02/09/10 81
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

As with Fast Feed, a Safe Target is calculated based on the amount left to feed minus
the Timed Feed Plant Erraticness percentage or absolute value. Multiple Timed
Feeds can occur up to the Maximum Number of Timed Feeds value.

³ JOG FEED

Jog Feed is typically used for aggregates and cements and opens and closes the gate
enough to allow small jog bites of material to fall through. The time duration the gate
opens and closes depends on the Jog Weight, Jog Time and Jog Settle Time values.

The system automatically adjusts the Jog Time by the Jog Time Adjust value to
achieve the Jog Weight per jog.

Jog Feed can start if ALL of the following are true:

ƒ Jog Feed is enabled.
ƒ Fast and/or Timed Feed finishes without getting the material to target.
ƒ The Maximum Number of Jogs is a non-zero value.

POSSIBLE FEED CONFIGURATION

Feeding occurs in the following order: Fast, Timed, and Jog.

For bins with more than one gate, the only gate that jogs is Gate 1. The other gates
stop feeding when the Fast Feed cutoff value is reached (i.e., when the scale weight
equals Target – Extra Gate Shutoff – Preact – Plant Erraticness).

The following sample Bins screen shows a possible configuration for an aggregate
feed that uses two gates.

02/09/10 82
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Bins Screen (with possible configuration for two gates)

02/09/10 83
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

With the configuration shown in the previous screen example:

• Both Gates 1 and 2 fast feed until the amount left to feed is less than the
Minimum to Fast Feed value (1500 lbs) AND greater than the re-calculated
target minus Plant Erraticness for Timed Feed. Then Timed Feed starts for
Gate 1 and Gate 2 closes.
• Gate 1 time feeds until the amount left to feed is less than the Minimum to
Time Feed value (750 lbs) AND less than the re-calculated target minus Plant
Erraticness for Timed Feed. Then Jog Feed starts for Gate 1.
• Gates 1 jog feeds until the amount left to feed is less than the Jog Weight
value (jogging ignores scale readings). Gate 1 closes.

Note: Gate 3 is typically used to turn on Aeration for Cement feeds. Manual
Material Monitoring is not tracked for Gate 3.

02/09/10 84
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SCALES SCREEN
After configuring bins and silos, you should set up your scales. This is done on the
SCALES screen (2 pages shown next). On this screen, you can add a scale, or edit
parameters for an existing one.

NOTE: If you are setting up a serial scale, see the External Serial Device Setup
Guide for instructions.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, or [F5] to
go to the Bins screen.

Scales Screen – Page 1

Scales Screen – Page 2

02/09/10 85
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
(PAGE 1 – SCALES SCREEN)

Code Browseable list of scales.

Name Description of the scale.
Grad/Unit Read-only field that displays the scale graduation size
(e.g. 20.00) and scale units (e.g. lb).
Capacity Read-only field that displays the maximum amount of
weight that the scale can hold.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field enables/disables freewheeling for this scale.
Keyboard Hold Browseable field containing a list of function keys. The
one selected can be used on the Graph screen to hold this
device from discharging.
Display Group Browseable field containing a list of group color numbers
in which to display this device on the Graph screen.
These color numbers correspond to the colors selected
for the Graph screen on the Batching Defaults screen.
Display Order Order in which this scale is to be displayed with other
scales on the Graph screen.
Flow Control Yes/No field that allows/disallows the system to open
Enabled? and close the gate to maintain a constant flow rate. If this
field is set to “N,” the system opens the gate all the way,
then closes it once loading is done.
Maximum Flow Rate Maximum flow rate allowed in scale units per second.
Minimum Flow Rate Minimum flow rate allowed in scale units per second.
Alt Bin After (sec) These fields work together. If Bin Mapping is allowed
Sec Flow Under(lb/sec) on the Batching Defaults screen, the system uses the Alt
Bin After and Sec Flow Under parameters to determine
how many seconds to try a feed before switching to the
alternate bin.
Vibrator On If Flow When the flow rate slows down to this rate, the vibrator
Below is activated.
Flow Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits after loading
has begun to check the flow rate. This is necessary
because the flow rate is erratic at the start of a load.
Open Time at Start Length of time, in seconds, the gate should be opened at
the start of the loading the truck or mixer to get the
material flowing.

02/09/10 86
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Close Time at Start Duration of the gate close output pulse.
Open Adjust Pulse Length of time, in seconds, the gate opens to keep the
material flow rate constant.
Close Adjust Pulse Length of time, in seconds, the gate closes to keep the
material flow rate constant.
Scale Empty When the material left to discharge reaches this amount,
the scale is considered empty by the system.
Zero Tolerance Over Amount the scale is allowed to read above zero and still
be within its zero tolerance range.
Zero Tolerance Under Amount the scale is allowed to read below zero and still
be within its zero tolerance range.
Turn Vibrator On Scale weight at which the vibrator is turned on during
discharge.
Gate Wide Open Scale weight at which the gate is opened all the way to
completely empty the scale.
Hold Empty Scale Length of time, in seconds, the gate should be help open
Open even after the scale weight reads zero to allow the last
bits of material to fall out of the scale.
Scale Settle Time Length of time, in seconds, the system should wait before
checking the weight on the scale. This is because the
scale tends to bounce up and down after being loaded.
Accurate readings cannot be obtained until the scale is
allowed to settle.
Max Gate Close Time Duration of the gate close output pulse.
Gate Close Forced? Yes/No field. Forces gate closed before feeding starts.
If “Yes,” the gate close time must always expire before
the scale will be used.
Start Delay Number of seconds to wait before feeding or discharging
actually starts.
Inputs
Hold Disch I/O point for the HOLD button on the manual station.
Gate Closed I/O point for the limit switch on the gate that indicates
when the gate is closed.
Outputs
Gate Open I/O point for the signal the computer sends to open the
gate.
Gate Close I/O point for the signal the computer sends to close the
gate.
Vibrator I/O point for the signal to turn the vibrator on and off.

02/09/10 87
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Gate2 Open (Used for dual gate discharge control.) I/O point for the
signal the computer sends to open the gate.
Gate2 Close (Used for dual gate discharge control.) I/O point for the
signal the computer sends to close the gate.
(PAGE 2 – SCALES SCREEN)

Time between Flow Length of time between the computer’s flow rate
Calculation Updates calculations.
Flow based on [scale] The scale that this scale “watches” to base its own flow
lb control on.
Hold Type Types are:
N No hold.
Y Hold the based on device until flow resumes
S System hold, operator releases.
Plus Indicates the amount of material on the belt - the amount
of material still to be blended after the scale reads empty.
Maximum Flow Rate Maximum flow rate allowed for the scale selected in the
for Based on Scale Flow based on field above.
Score Board Port Port parameter that identifies the device used as a remote
scale display. (Port parameters are entered on the Port
Parameters screen.)
Serial Scale Port Port parameter that identifies the device used as a serial
scale. (Port parameters are entered on the Port
Parameters screen.)
Open2 Time at Start Length of time, in seconds, the gate should be opened at
the start of loading the truck or mixer to get the material
flowing.
Close2 Time at Start Duration of the gate close output pulse.
Open2 Adjust Pulse Length of time, in seconds, the gate opens to keep the
material flow rate constant.
Close2 Adjust Pulse Length of time, in seconds, the gate closes to keep the
material flow rate constant.

02/09/10 88
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª MOTION DETECTION

SETUP

Motion Detection ensures that a scale’s reading is stable before its value is recorded.
Motion Detection is used in the following situations:

• To capture the scale’s Start Tare – before the first material is fed into the
scale.
• To record correct Batch Weights - after the scale’s Settle delay and before the
Tolerance Check on the batched material.
• To capture the scale’s End Tare – after the scale's discharge cycle is complete.

To enable Motion Detection:

1. Open the Scale/Meter I/O screen. From the Main Menu, select Plant Setup >
Calibration & Test > Scale/Meter I/O.
2. In the Motion Range field, enter the number of scale movement graduations
that correspond to an “in motion” condition.
Note: A value of zero in the Motion Range field disables motion checking.

OPERATION

When a batch is run, if the scale's flow rate is within the specified motion range for
three consecutive samples, taken every one-tenth of a second, the scale is considered
stable and the system records the scale's value. If three consecutive "no motion"

02/09/10 89
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

samples are not read during a 1.5 second motion sampling period, the system issues
the "In Motion" error message as shown in the following screen example.

Operator choices are:

• Press <F4> to accept the error. The accepted motion error (Start Tare, End
Tare, or Batch Weight) will then be marked with an “m” beside the weight on
the ticket.

Note: Other tolerance check errors take precedence over motion checking and
may overwrite the “in motion” flag.

• Press <F6> to re-read the scale and perform the motion check again.

02/09/10 90
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FLOW CONTROL DAMPENING

This feature allows scale flow rates to be dampened to allow more precise feed cutoff
calculations and drop determinations.

SETUP

For each scale that uses Flow Control:

5. From the Main Menu, select Plant Setup > Scales. The Scales screen appears.

Scales Screen

6. Set the Flow Control Enabled? field to ‘Y’.

7. Save your changes and close the Scales screen.
8. From the Main Menu, select Plant Setup > Calibration & Test > Scale/Meter
I/O. The Scale/Meter I/O screen appears.

02/09/10 91
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Scale/Meter I/O Screen

9. Enter a value from 0.01 to 0.99 in the Damp. Factor field. (A value of 0.1 is
recommended.)
10. Save your changes. The following message appears.
This change will cause weighing errors and will be
reported! Proceed? Y/N

11. Press the ‘Y’ key to continue. The following warning message appears.

12. Press <F4> to clear the warning message.

13. Reboot the RTC.

Note: Flow information can be logged to a file for further analysis. See the separate
document titled “Flow Control Dampening” for more information about this
service tool.

02/09/10 92
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

METERED LIQUIDS
After you have set up bins and scales, you should set up metered liquids (e.g. admixes
and metered water). In the next section, you will be setting up bottles, then assigning
feed destinations to each bin, silo, and bottle. For now, let’s focus on the METERED
LIQUIDS screen (shown next) and a description of the fields on this screen.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, or [F5] to
go to the Material Assignments screen.

Metered Liquids Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Browseable list of metered liquids.
Material Description of the metered liquid.
Monitor Enabled? Yes/No field that allows/disallows manual feeding of this
material to be tracked and recorded.
Graduation/Unit Read-only field. Amount of this liquid dispensed (in
metered units) per meter graduation. This value comes
from the Scale and Meter I/O Setup screen, where E-Z
Cal Manual Station configurations for plant equipment
were entered.

02/09/10 93
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Maximum Capacity Read-only field. Maximum capacity of the tank (in
metered units). This value comes from the Scale and
Meter I/O Setup screen, where E-Z Cal Manual Station
configurations for plant equipment were entered.
Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys. The one selected can
be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from
discharging.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field enables/disables freewheeling for this scale.
Display Group Browseable list of group color numbers in which to
display this device on the Graph screen. These color
numbers correspond to the colors selected for the Graph
screen on the Batching Defaults screen.
Skip Zero Check? Yes/No field that allows/disallows zero checking for this
device (i.e. checking to see if scale is within zero range).
Flow Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits after the
valves are opened to check if the flow rate is between the
maximum and minimum flow rates.
Switch to Alternate These fields work together. The system switches to the
Tank After (sec) alternate tank if the flow rate stays below the If Flow
If Flow Rate Below Rate Below amount for the number of seconds shown in
(lb/sec) the Switch to Alternate Tank After field.
(NOTE: Bin Mapping must be enabled on the Batching
Defaults screen.)
Preact Amount This value is calculated by the system. This value is the
amount of liquid that enters the mix after the valve is
closed. The system subtracts this amount from the target
amount, then closes the valve at the new target amount.
Preact Override Any non-zero amount entered here is used as the preact
Amount instead of what is calculated by the computer.
Plant Erraticness Takes into account variations in accuracy for the
metering device. The system closes the valve when the
liquid dispensed equals the target minus Preact minus
Plant Erraticness.
Valve B Shutoff Used to prevent “water hammers” due to remaining
pressure, which causes the target to be exceeded. When
the amount dispensed nears the target, the larger valve
(Valve B) is shut, and the smaller valve (Valve A)
remains open until the target is reached.
Coast (Settle) Time Length of time, in seconds, required for the pump motor
to completely stop running.

02/09/10 94
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits before
starting discharge for this metered liquid.
Hold Feed Browseable field of I/O points for the tank hold limit
switch. Automatically shuts the valve if a problem is
detected by the system.
Valve A Browseable list of I/O points for the Valve A feed output.
Valve B Browseable list of I/O points for the Valve B feed output.

02/09/10 95
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ADMIXTURE BOTTLES
Now that you have set up metered liquids, you can set up the bottles they will feed
into. This is done on the ADMIXTURE BOTTLES screen (shown next). Fields on this
screen are described in the table after that.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, [F5] to go
to the Metered Liquids screen, or [F6] to go to the Feed Destinations screen.

Admixture Bottles Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Browseable list of admixture bottles.
Name Description of the admixture bottle.
Capacity/Unit Maximum capacity of the bottle in the unit selected.
Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys. The one selected can
be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from
discharging.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field enables/disables freewheeling for this
admixture bottle.
Display Group Browseable list of group color numbers in which to
display this device on the Graph screen. These color
numbers correspond to the colors selected for the Graph
screen on the Batching Defaults screen.

02/09/10 96
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Blowout Time Length of time, in seconds, the valve on the hose must
stay open after the bottle is empty to allow all fluid to
drain from the hose. (NOTE: Prevents lines from
freezing in cold weather.)
Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits before
starting discharge from this admixture bottle.
Hold Discharge Browseable field of I/O points for the bottle hold limit
switch. Automatically shuts the valve if a problem is
detected by the system.
Bottle Empty Browseable list of I/O points for the “Bottle Empty”
input.
Bottle Full Browseable list of I/O points for the “Bottle Full” input.
Discharge Browseable field of I/O points for the bottle discharge
output.

02/09/10 97
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

HOLDING TANKS
If holding tanks are used (e.g. for water), you should set them up on the HOLDING
TANKS screen. This should be done before you assign feed destinations to each
device.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, [F5] to go
to the Metered Liquids screen, or [F6] to go to the Feed Destinations screen.

Holding Tanks Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Browseable list of holding tanks.
Name Description of the holding tank.
Capacity/Unit Maximum capacity of the holding tank in the unit
selected.
Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys. The one selected can
be used on the Graph screen to hold this device from
discharging.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field enables/disables freewheeling for this
holding tank.
Discharge Time Length of time, in seconds, the valve on the hose must
stay open after the holding tank is empty to allow all
fluid to drain from the hose.

02/09/10 98
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits before
starting discharge from the holding tank.
Hold Discharge Browseable list of I/O points for the tank hold limit
switch. Automatically shuts the valve if a problem is
detected by the system.
Tank Empty Browseable list of I/O points for the “Tank Empty”
input.
Tank Full Browseable list of I/O points for the “Tank Full” input.
Discharge Browseable list of I/O points for the tank discharge
output.
Hold Source Feeds Browseable list of I/O points for the hold source feeds
output.
Initial Charge Done Browseable list of I/O points for the initial charge done
output.
Final Charge Start Browseable list of I/O points for the final charge start
output.

02/09/10 99
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CONVEYOR BELTS
If conveyor belts are used, they should be set up on the CONVEYOR BELTS screen.
This should be done before you assign feed destinations to each device.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, or [F6] to
go to the Feed Destinations screen.

Conveyor Belts Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Browseable list of conveyor belts.
Name Description of the conveyor belt.
Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys. The one selected can
be used on the Graph screen to hold this belt.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field enables/disables freewheeling for this
device.
Start/Stop Mode Running mode of the belt. Choices are:
Y - means the system sends a pulse to start the belt, then
another pulse to stop it.
N - means the system sends a continuous signal to start
the belt and keep it running. When the system stops
sending the signal, the belt stops running.

02/09/10 100
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Ignore Hold Y – means this device ignores hold signals from the
operator. Prevents belts and diverters from becoming
jammed if they stop moving
Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits before
starting the conveyor belt.
Horn Blow Time Length of time, in seconds, the horn blows after Start
Delay has completed.
Belt Clear Time Length of time, in seconds, typically required for a
“rock” to travel from the beginning to the end of the belt.
Start/Stop Pulse Duration of the pulse, in seconds, sent to the Start and
Stop output addresses.
Start Browseable list of I/O points for the “Start” output.
Stop Browseable list of I/O points for the “Stop” output.
Horn Browseable list of I/O points for the “Horn” output.

02/09/10 101
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

EXTRA DEVICES
The EXTRA DEVICES screen is used to set up extra devices such as a beeper to signal
the end of a load.

As with many Spectrum screens, you can go directly to other related screens from this
one. For instance, you can press [F4] to go to the I/O Assignments screen, or [F6] to
go to the Feed Destinations screen.

Extra Devices Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Browseable list of extra devices.
Name Description of the extra device.
Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys. The one selected can
be used on the Graph screen to hold this device.
Allow Early Feed? Yes/No field enables/disables freewheeling for this
device.

02/09/10 102
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Pulse Mode Running mode of this device. Choices are:
Y - means the system sends a pulse to start the device,
then another pulse to stop it. Use this for double-action
solenoids.
N - means the system sends a continuous signal to start
the device and keep it running. When the system stops
sending the signal, the device stops running. Use this for
single-action solenoids.
Ignore Hold Y – means this device ignores hold signals from the
operator. Prevents belts and diverters from becoming
jammed if they stop moving
Repeat Pulse Yes/No field that allows/disallows the pulse attribute to
repeat. Ex: This allows a “beeper” function to be
created.
Start Delay Length of time, in seconds, the system waits before
starting the device.
Pulse Time Duration of the pulse, in seconds, that the system sends
to move the device. In the case of a diverter, a pulse
moves the diverter from one position to another. A
second pulse moves the diverter back to its original
position.
Clear Time Length of time, in seconds, the device remains in place
or stays on after the load is completed. In the case of a
diverter, this allows all material to be cleared from the
diverter.
Start Limit Browseable list of I/O points for the “Start” input.
Stop Limit Browseable list of I/O points for the “Stop” input.
Start Browseable list of I/O points for the “Start” output.
Stop Browseable list of I/O points for the “Stop” output.
Interface Device Reads data from an external source (manual station
display scale or counter, or external serial device) and
stores the value for the externally added material.
External Interface Port parameter for the interface device.
Material Code Material that can be externally added and whose added
amount is recorded by the external source.
Unit Unit of measure printed on tickets for data received from
the extra device.
Type Device type. C (counter), or S (scale).
Display Order Order the extra device is displayed at the bottom of the
Graph Screen with scales, bottles, and other devices.

02/09/10 103
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ASSIGNING MATERIALS TO BINS & BOTTLES

MATERIAL ASSIGNMENTS SCREEN

After feed source and destinations have been set up and ingredients added to the
database, you can assign materials to bins and admixes to bottles.

ª TO ASSIGN MATERIALS TO A DEVICE

1. From the Main Menu, select Plant Setup > Material Assignments. The Material
Assignments form appears.

Material Assignments Screen

2. Assign the material to the appropriate bins/silos. (A material can be stored in

multiple bins, one or more of which can be currently active.)
3. Save your data.

• In the above screen example, material 2 CR GR is assigned to Bins 5 and 6.

Bin 6 is “inactive,” meaning the system will feed from Bin 5 when this
material is used. If both bins were enabled, the system would feed from both
bins.
• To assign liquid materials to bottles, press <F4> and liquid devices and their
assigned materials are displayed.

02/09/10 104
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Plant Browseable list of plants.
Device Type Read-only field showing either B (for Bins), or L (for
Liquids). Defaults to B. Press [F4] to toggle back and
forth between bin-type and liquid-type devices.
Device Browseable list of bins or admixes. For bin-type devices,
this list shows only bins and silos. For liquid-type
devices, this list shows only admixes.
Material Browseable list of all ingredients in the system.
Enabled? Yes/No field for activating/deactivating the bin or admix
tank.
Moisture On? Yes/No field for allowing/disallowing moisture
adjustment calculation for this material.
Low Inventory When the actual inventory reaches the amount listed
here, the material name is displayed in red on the Batch
Setup screen.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save To save data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse To pull up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F4] - Toggle To toggle back and forth between bin-type and admix-type
devices.
[F5] - Ins Ln Inserts a blank row above the current one.
[F6] - Del Ln Deletes the current row.
[F7] - Clear Clears all data from the screen. Be careful about using
this function!

02/09/10 105
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

AUTO BIN SWITCHING

This feature causes the system to automatically select an alternate source without
operator intervention when a feed timeout occurs.

ª SETUP

1. From the Main Menu, select System Maintenance > Batching Defaults. The
Batching Defaults screen appears.

Batching Defaults screen

2. In the Bin Mapping section, enter a ‘Y’ in the Allowed field.

3. In the Bin Mapping section, enter a ‘Y’ in the Auto field.
4. Save your changes.

ª OPERATION

When a feed timeout occurs, the system checks for an alternate source for the
material. If an alternate source is available, the remaining required material is fed
from the alternate bin. This happens without operator intervention.

If a feed timeout occurs and there are no remaining alternate feed sources, the error
pop shown in the following screen example is displayed so that the operator can take
action the same way he would for manual bin switching.

02/09/10 106
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª TICKET PRINTING FOR SWITCHED BINS

• If an alternate bin was used, a ‘@’ is printed beside the material’s Actual
amount on the ticket.

• If a substitute material was used, a ‘#’ is printed beside the material’s Actual
amount on the ticket.

• If material was fed from two different bins, and both bins have a moisture
probe, moisture values are ‘weighted’ for the proportion of each material.

02/09/10 107
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SETTING FEED DESTINATIONS

FEED DESTINATIONS SCREEN
After configuring devices (bins and silos, scales, bottles, mixers, trucks, etc.), you can
assign feed destinations to each device. This is done on the FEED DESTINATIONS
screen (shown next).

Feed Destinations Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Plant Name Browseable field containing list of available plants.
Source The source device for this feed relationship. Examples:
A bin can feed into a scale; a scale can feed into a truck,
mixer, or holding hopper; an admix can feed into a bottle,
mixer, or a truck; a bottle can feed into a mixer or a
truck.
Property Set If a property set record has been created for the source
device, the PSET number will appear in this field. (See
“Device Property Sets” for more information.
Destination The destination device for this feed relationship. (See
examples for Source above.)
Trace? Yes/No field that sets whether debugging tracepoints are
activated for this feed relationship. Defaults to No.
Command Alkon personnel should only change this field.

02/09/10 108
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save To save data you have entered or changed.
Note: Changes to property set records will not become
effective until the Feed Destinations screen is
saved.
[F2] - Browse To pull up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields
have these brackets [ ].
[F3] - More To “drill down” to the selected device’s edit screen. This
drill down feature is available for source, destination, and
property set devices.
Note: This key is disabled if the Feed Destinations
screen was accessed from a device edit screen.
[F4] - P_Set To create/delete a “property set” device. A property set
is created if none exists. If a property set exists, the
system asks you if the property set is to the deleted.
[F5] - Ins Ln Inserts a blank row above the current row.
[F6] - Del Ln Deletes the current row.
Note: When you delete a line from a device edit screen,
the actual record is not deleted until you save the
Feed Destinations screen.
[F7] - Clear Clears the current screen. Be careful about using this
function!
[F8] Works with the [F4] key to delete a property set record.
Position the cursor in Property Set column on the row
containing the desired property set device and press [F4].
The system displays the following prompt: “Press F8 to
delete Property Set PSETnn, Esc to continue.” Press
[F8] to blank the field.
Note: The actual property set record will not be deleted
until you save the Feed Destinations screen.

02/09/10 109
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

DEVICE PROPERTY SETS

A separate device parameter set (Property Set) can be assigned to each source device
in a feed destination relationship. This permits a source device to have different
settings (I/O, timing, etc.) depending on the destination device. Examples are mixers
with multiple doors, or a scale with two sets of discharge gates, each going to a
different mixer or truck lane.

Property set records are added, modified, or deleted from the FEED DESTINATIONS
screen. Procedures for performing these functions are given after the following
screen example.

Feed Destinations Screen (showing Property Sets)

ª ADDING A NEW PROPERTY SET

1. Go to PLANT SETUP­FEED DESTINATIONS and arrow down to the row containing

the desired source device.
2. Press [F4]. The system creates a property set device record by making a copy of the
source device record and assigning a system-generated device code in the form
“PSETnnn”, where nnn is a value from 000 to 999.
For example, if you were creating a new property set record for a scale, the PSET
number would appear in the Code field of a copy of the SCALES screen.
3. Change the appropriate data on the new property set record. For example, you might
select a different Input or Output.
4. Press [F1] to exit the new record and return to the FEED DESTINATIONS screen, then
press [F1] again to save the new property set record.

02/09/10 110
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª EDITING AN EXISTING PROPERTY SET

1. On the FEED DESTINATIONS screen, position the cursor in the Property Set column
on the row containing the desired source device and press [F3]. The property device
record appears for editing. Note that the Code field is displayed in yellow and is not
editable.
2. Make the desired changes to the record and press [F1] to save the record and return to
the FEED DESTINATIONS screen.

ª DELETING A DEVICE PROPERTY SET

1. On the FEED DESTINATIONS screen, position the cursor on the row containing the
desired source device and press [F4]. The system displays the following prompt:
“Press F8 to delete Property Set PSETnnn, Esc to continue.”
2. Press [F8] to blank the field.

Note: The actual property set record will not be deleted until you save the FEED
DESTINATIONS screen.

ª MANUAL MATERIAL MONITORING OF PSET IO’S

PSET IO’s for a given device can also be used for MMM events instead of the IO of
the original device. (An MMM event occurs when material is manually batched.)

When the open/discharge IO point of the bottle or scale is activated, the MMM event
is started and the current scale or counter value is recorded. At the ‘done’ event, the
current scale or counter value is recorded and a Spectrum mat_log record is created.
The difference between the ‘done’ and ‘start’ values is the amount used.

If an MMM event occurs during an auto-load when any other auto-feeds are feeding
into a shared batcher (scale or metered feed), the auto-feed is ‘aborted’ and an errpop
is displayed stating what happened. The amount used and the load_id are recorded as
part of the MMM event.

02/09/10 111
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Example PSET assignments:

Source Property Destination Comments

Device Set Device
BIN01 PSET001 AGG1 SCALE
BIN01 PSET002 AGG2 SCALE This configuration is rarely
used.
AGG1 SCALE PSET010 MIXER
AGG1 SCALE PSET011 TRUCK
AGG2 SCALE PSET012 TRUCK This configuration is rarely
used.
WATER PSET020 MIXER
WATER PSET021 TRUCK
ADMIX01 PSET030 BOTTLE01
ADMIX01 PSET031 MIXER
ADMIX01 PSET032 TRUCK

02/09/10 112
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCHING & SYSTEM DEFAULTS

After plant devices have been set up and materials assigned to devices, batching and
system default parameters need to be entered. The two screens used for these
purposes are the BATCHING DEFAULTS and SYSTEM DEFAULTS screens. These two
screens are discussed in this section.

BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN

On this screen (2 pages shown next), you can enter or modify default settings that
affect batching operations. Important among these settings are maximum load size,
default slump, and keyboard holds.

Batching Defaults Screen – Page 1

02/09/10 113
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Batching Defaults Screen – Page 2

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
PAGE 1 – BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN
Plant Name Browseable field containing list of available plants.
Maximum Load Size / Default maximum load size that this plant is capable of
Unit batching. The Unit is the unit of measure for the load
size (yd or m3).
Next Load Number Number of the next load for this plant. Each time a load
is run, this number is incremented by one.
Maximum Number of Maximum number of batches that this plant can run per
Batches load. If this value is “1,” multi-batching is disabled.
Continuous Run? Yes/No field that sets whether the system will run
without the operator pressing the [F9] – RUN button.
Continuous Discharge? Yes/No field that sets whether the system will discharge
without the operator pressing the [F11] – DISCH button.
WATER
Trim Ingredient to be trimmed on the Batch Setup screen.
Normally water. Both this field and the Adjust field must
match the main water ingredient or the trim and
adjustment of water will not work. For instance, if the
main water is COLD, then both fields must have COLD
selected. This is a browseable field.

02/09/10 114
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Default Default amount of water to be trimmed from each
yd/meter. This value appears on the Batch Setup screen.
Adjust Ingredient to be adjusted on the Batch Setup screen,
where you can adjust the ingredient on a load basis (i.e.
gallons per Load).
Min in Truck Minimum amount of water that can be recorded as in the
truck when the load is batched. This value appears on
the Batch Setup screen as In Truck.
Max in Truck Maximum amount of water that can be recorded as in the
truck when the load is batched. This value appears on
the Batch Setup screen as In Truck.
SEQUENCE
Base Base sequence for this plant. Base means the mix
sequence is laid on top of this one.
Default Default sequence code that is pulled onto the Batch
Setup screen. If the mix design contains a sequence
code, it overrides the default.
Auto Sequencing? Yes/No field that sets up basic default sequences when
set to “Y.” Feeds will start at batch start and discharge
devices will start when system discharge has been
activated.
Synch Discharge? Yes/No field that, when set to “Y,” holds all discharge
devices until all feeds are done.
Tolerance Device Browseable list of extra devices that could be used to
alert the operator of an out-of-tolerance condition.
SLUMP
Default Default slump for this plant. This value appears on the
Mix Designs screen when you enter a new mix.
Minimum Minimum slump allowed for a mix used at this plant.
Maximum Maximum slump allowed for a mix used at this plant.
Enable Slump Table? Yes/No field that, when set to “Y,” allows slump tables
to be used for slump calculations. When slump tables are
used, the standard “linear” method of slump adjustment
is not used. (See “Slump Tables” for more information.)
Default Default slump table that will be used at batch time if
Slump Tables are enabled but no slump table has been
attached to the mix design (on the MIX DESIGNS screen).

02/09/10 115
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Base Admix Code The code entered here is added to all mixes batched. For
instance, if you want to add Hot water to all mixes, you
can create an Admix design for Hot water then enter its
code in this field. Hot water would then be automatically
added to each mix that was batched.
NOTE: Changes to the following fields require a reboot.
Number of Feeds Maximum number of feeds that this plant may have
active at any one time. DO NOT change this without
calling Command Alkon first! Usually set to 20 feeds.
Maximum of 100.
Allowed? Yes/No field that sets whether the system is allowed to
switch to a secondary bin if the primary bin runs low.
We recommend that this be set to “Y.”
Auto? Yes/No field that sets whether the system switches to a
secondary bin without alerting the operator that bin
switching is occurring. If this field is set to “Y”, the
Allow field must also be set to “Y”.
Permanent? Yes/No field that sets whether the system is allowed to
make a secondary bin the primary bin if the original
primary bin runs empty. Should be set to “Y.”

Default Batch Code Default batch code that appears on the Batch Setup
screen. Choices are:
B – Print ticket WITHOUT batch weights.
Y – Print ticket WITH batch weights.
Default Simulation Default simulation status that appears on the Batch Setup
Code screen. Choices are:
B – Run an actual batch.
S – Run a simulated batch.
T – Run a training batch.
Save Simulated Drops Yes/No field that sets whether the system will save
records for debugging purposes from simulated batches.

02/09/10 116
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
KEYBOARD HOLD LABELS
F1 Meaningful labels for the keyboard hold keys used on the
F2 Graph screen can be assigned here. Select them from
browseable lists or enter your own.
F3
NOTE: The actual function keys used for holding bins,
F4 scales, bottles, and other devices are designated on the
F5 appropriate Plant Setup screens. For instance, the
F6 keyboard hold for Agg feed is set on the Bins screen, and
the hold for Agg discharge is set on the Scales screen.
Normally, F1 is used for Aggregate, F2 for Cement, F3
for Water, and F4 for Admix.
GROUP DISPLAY COLOR
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Colors in which groups of materials will be displayed on
the Graph screen. Each group number has a browseable
list of colors. Choose a color for each group.

Inspect Mode Yes/No field that sets whether the system will run in
Allowed? Inspect Mode. This requires that an INSPECT_OK I/O
point be defined.
Custom Equation Activates/deactivates custom equation processing
Mode (software that emulates a PLC controller). Choices are:
A – for Activate
O – for Off
Returned Mix Max Length of time, in minutes, a returned mix can be in the
Age truck and still be used.
50 Line Graph Screen Y – means the Graph screen will be displayed with 50
rows.
N – means the Graph screen will be displayed with 25
rows.
PAGE 2 – BATCHING DEFAULTS SCREEN
CEMENT
Trial (Applies to Mix Design Polynomials. Refer to the Mix
Design Polynomial document for details.)
Min (Applies to Mix Design Polynomials. Refer to the Mix
Design Polynomial document for details.)
Max (Applies to Mix Design Polynomials. Refer to the Mix
Design Polynomial document for details.)

02/09/10 117
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION

Moisture Entry Type Used for moisture and absorption calculations. Choices
are S (for SSD) and D (for Oven Dry).
Default Mix Entry Mix Type that appears by default when you create a new
Type mix design. Choices are S (for SSD), O (for Oven Dry
MnDOT), and D (for Oven Dry).
Note: For “Oven Dry MnDOT” water is entered in the
mix design as FREE water instead of as TOTAL
water.
Round Batch Size By This factor is used for rounding batch sizes up or down
so that they are evenly divisible by this factor. By
default, this field is set to zero so that Spectrum will
divide a large load into multiple batches of equal size.
When a value besides zero is entered in this field,
Spectrum rounds each batch of a multi-batch load
(except for the last batch) by this factor.
Ideally, the load size should be evenly divisible by the
round-by factor. Two examples are given next, one for a
load size evenly divisible by the round-by factor and
another for a load size that is not.
Example 1:
Load Size evenly divisible by Round-By Factor
Load Size = 6.2 m3
Batch Size Round By Factor = .10
Max Batch Size = 5 m3
This load would be split into two batches of 3.1 m3
each.
Example 2:
Load Size NOT evenly divisible by Round-By Factor
Load Size = 6.15 m3
Batch Size Round By Factor = .10
Max Batch Size = 5 m3
This load would be split into two batches. The first
batch would be 3.1 m3 and the second (and last) batch
would be 3.05 m3.

02/09/10 118
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SYSTEM DEFAULTS
On this screen (2 pages shown below), you can do things like assign labels to user
defined fields, set default truck trip times, and set how many days to keep batch weight,
ticket, and other records.

System Defaults Screen – Page 1

System Defaults Screen – Page 2

02/09/10 119
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
(PAGE 1 – SYSTEM DEFAULTS SCREEN)

USER DEFINED FIELDS

1. Field labels for user-defined fields that appear on the
2. Order Entry, Projects, and Edit Tickets screens. These
labels can be up to 5 characters long.
3.
AUTO ADD DATES
Summer You can apply special charges to batches run on or after
this date but before the Winter date. MM/DD format.
You can also automatically add extra products to the
order based on the Summer and Winter dates. They will
be pulled into the order automatically.
Winter You can apply special charges to batches run on or after
this date but before the Summer date. MM/DD format.
You can also automatically add extra products to the
order based on the Summer and Winter dates. They will
be pulled into the order automatically.
RETURNED CONCRETE FLAGS
Auto Fill? If you enter a truck number and a returned quantity, the
last mix batched on this truck is pulled into this field.
Override Enabled? If you are using returned concrete which is incompatible
with the mix in the order, an error pop occurs. This field
lets you override the error pop and use the returned
concrete, even though it is incompatible.
LANGUAGE CONFIGURATION
Language Either English or Spanish.
Currency Either US_Dollar or Peso.
Date Date format. Either MMDDYY (US) or DDMMYY
(European).

02/09/10 120
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Allow Link Mix This flag is used with COMMANDbatch and should be
Conversion? set to Y so that Ulink converts amounts on the
COMMANDbatch ticket/load to match Spectrum’s units.
Default Units Either YD (for cubic yards) or M3 (for cubic meter).
Test Mix Mix code used for test purposes.
Washout Mix Mix code used for truck washout.
TRANSIENT RECORDS
Keep Batch Weights Default number of days to keep batch weights. Batch
weights older than this are deleted.
Keep Ticket/Load Default number of days to keep ticket records. Ticket
Information records older than this are deleted.
Keep Batch Default number of days to keep batch records. Batch
Information records older than this are deleted.
Keep Drop Records Default number of days to drop records for debugging
purposes. Drop records older than this are deleted.
Keep Incoming Default number of days to keep incoming inventory
Records records. Incoming inventory records older than this are
deleted.

Quick Ticket to Load Yes/No field that sets whether to display “quick tickets”
Index? on the Load Index. (Quick tickets are normally
generated for non-concrete products.)
NOTE: Changes to the following field requires a reboot.
Batchbook Format (Used with Mix Design Polynomials.)
(PAGE 2 – SYSTEM DEFAULTS SCREEN)

DEFAULT TRUCK TRIP TIMES

These default times appear on the “Order Times” window of the Order Entry
screen (by pressing [F3]). You can change these times on this window.
Traveling Time Default length of time for a truck to drive from a plant to
a job site.
Waiting Time Default length of time that a truck must wait at the job
site before unloading.
Unloading Time Default length of time needed for a truck to completely
unload all of its concrete at the job site.
Unloading Time Per Default length of time needed for a truck to unload a
Unit cubic yard or cubic meter of concrete.
Washing Out Time Default length of time needed to wash out a truck after it
has completed unloading its concrete.

02/09/10 121
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Returning Time Default length of time needed for a truck to travel from
the job site back to the plant.
DISPATCH AUTOMATIC STATUS CONFIGURATION
NOTE: Used Only with the Mini-Dispatch Feature
Allow Auto Truck Yes/No field that sets whether trucks can automatically
Status ? advance through the phases of a delivery on the Mini-
Dispatch screen.
Enable Auto Travel Yes/No field that sets whether a truck can automatically
Status ? advance from the “Washing Down” to the “Traveling to”
status.
Enable Auto On Job Yes/No field that sets whether a truck can automatically
Status ? advance from the “Traveling to” to the “Waiting On Job”
status.
Enable Auto Yes/No field that sets whether a truck can automatically
Unloading Status ? advance from the “Waiting On Job” to the “Unloading”
status.
Enable Auto Wash Out Yes/No field that sets whether a truck can automatically
Status ? advance from the “Unloading” to the “Washing Out”
status.
Enable Auto Return Yes/No field that sets whether a truck can automatically
Status advance from the “Washing Out” to the “Returning”
status.

02/09/10 122
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN

CAUTION! Only properly trained and authorized personnel should make entries on
this screen. Incorrect entries on this screen can result in bad batches.

OVERVIEW
Material calculations define the manner in which mix design weights are converted to
target batch weights. Material calculations use material Groups, with each material
belonging to one or more Groups, and each type of calculation being performed
simultaneously on the entire Group. Calculations are performed in the order listed on
the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS screen and are independent of the order of
ingredients in the mix design.

There are pre-defined material Groups: Cement – 2 CEM, Aggregate – 1 AGG ,

Admixture – 4 ADX, Water – 3 WAT, Water Admix – 5 WATADX, and ALL.
There are also three user-defined Group codes allowed, which are defined by being
entered in the Group Code, Auxiliary Group, or Aux2 Group fields on the
INGREDIENTS screen.

Some calculations use only the ingredient quantities and the material calculation
factor recorded on the Material Calculations screen. Other calculations use factors
from the Ingredients screen.

The final target batch weights may or may not have the same units as the ingredients
in the mix. For instance, conversions between weight and volume units (e.g. lb to
gal) use the Weight-to-Volume Factor from the Ingredients screen.

Because material calculations are based on Groups and not on individual materials,
there are some restrictions. For example, an Admixture cannot be based on one
Cement and not on another, since by definition all Cements are in the same Group.
The amount of the based-on Admixture is therefore dependent upon the total amount
of ALL Cements.

There is a way to base an Admixture on one Cement. Assign the Cementitious

ingredient to its own user-defined Group. Then base the Admixture on this user-
defined Group.

CAUTION! This reorganization of Cement ingredients may alter the functioning of

other material calculations, such as Cements being based on and
correcting themselves.

To solve this problem, assign the Ingredient to more than one Group. In the above
case, you can make the Cementitious ingredient a member of two Groups, Cements
and CemAdx, with CemAdx being the user-defined additional Group. The Cement

02/09/10 123
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

based-on and correction calculations can still work on all Ingredients in the Cements
Group, and the Admixture based-on Cements calculation can specify that it will only
use Cementitious Ingredients in the CemAdx Group.

Note: Only one Admixture can be used to correct the Water Group (using the
correction factor entered for the Admixture ingredient).

STANDARD CONFIGURATION
The standard configuration for the Material Calculations screen is shown in the following
table.

Position Group 1 Group 2 Type Factor Recalculate? Trace Comments

Target
1 2 CEM 2 CEM X 0.000 N N
2 2 CEM 4 ADX B 0.000 N N
3 4 ADX 4 ADX E 0.000 N N
4 2 CEM F 0.000 N N
5 2 CEM R 1.000 N N
6 4 ADX 3 WAT C 1.000 N N
7 5 WATADX 3 WAT S 1.000 N N
8 5 WATADX 1 AGG S 0.000 N N
9 ALL T 0.000 N N
10 ALL A 0.000 N N
11 1 AGG 3 WAT M 0.000 Y N
12 3 WAT 3 WAT C 0.000 N N
13 3 WAT 3 WAT X 0.000 N N
14 ALL L 0.000 N N

FIELDS – MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Position Number that specifies the order in which the calculation is
performed in relation to all calculations listed on this screen.
Group 1 First group in the row to have the calculation specified in
the Type column run against it.
Group 2 Second group in the row to have the calculation specified in
the Type column run against it.
Type Specifies the calculation to be performed on the group(s)
listed in this row. Only one type can be selected from the
browse list. (See “Material Calculation Types” for an
explanation of each calculation type.)
Factor Calculation factor used for a particular calculation type.
Not all calculations use calculation factors. For those that
do, the factor is pre-determined by industry standards.

02/09/10 124
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Recalculate? A “Y” entered here instructs the system to perform the
Target calculation 10 times a second on the “target” amounts of
materials in the specified group(s). This helps the system
adjust for dynamic situations (i.e. moisture fluctuations).
Note: All Recalculate flags after the first "Y" on the
Material Calculations screen are effectively forced
to "Y" also. For this reason, groups that require
recalculations (i.e. Aggregate and Water) should be
listed near the end.
Trace? A “Y” entered here turns on error tracing for the calculation
listed in this row.
Comments This column is provided for you to enter any comments
about a particular row of calculations.

FUNCTION KEYS – MATERIAL CALCULATIONS SCREEN

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE
[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F5] - Insert Inserts a new row above the row currently selected.
[F7] - Clear Clears all information from the screen.
Caution: This operation erases all material calculation
information from the system! Be sure this is what
you want to do before you save this change!
[F8] - Delete Deletes the row currently selected.
Caution: Be sure this is what you want to do before you
save this change!

02/09/10 125
 Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MATERIAL CALCULATION TYPES

The calculation type determines which calculation will be performed on materials
specified for the group(s) listed in a particular row on the MATERIAL CALCULATIONS
screen. The calculation type is selected in the Type column. Each calculation type is
described below.

Type Name Description of Calculation

A Adjustment First Group = First Group – Adjustment Factor Amount
Used when the In Truck amount on the Batch Setup form is subtracted
from the calculated water amount for the load.
B Based On Second Group = First Group x Based On Factor
Bases the amount of one Group on the amount of another Group.
Typically, Admixtures are based on Cements.
C Correction Second Group = First Group x Correction Factor
Corrects the amount of one Group using the amount of another Group.
Typically, Admixtures or Aggregates correct Waters.
E Effectiveness First Group = First Group / Effectiveness Factor
Used to determine how much to adjust the target of a material according
to the material’s Effectiveness percentage.
F Substitution First Group = First Group x Substitution Factor
Used when one material is substituted for another and it is not a one-to-
one substitution. For example, it takes 1.05 units of flyash to equal 1 unit
of cement.
G General First Group = First Group x Mat Calculation Factor
Used for adding multiple parameters as necessary to a group of materials.
I Load Size No Ret All Groups = All Groups x Load Size_Amount
Used when Returned Concrete amounts are excluded from load size and
target calculations in multi-batch loads.
J 1Load Size No Re First Group = First Group x Load Size_Amount
Used when Returned Concrete amounts are excluded from load size and
target calculations in single-batch loads.
K Error Correct Second Group = Second Group +/- First Group Batch Errors
Used to correct one material based on the batching error of another
material (example: water corrections based on ice).
Note: This material calculation type must be entered on the last line of
the Material Calculations screen.
L Load Size (All) All Groups = All Groups x (Load Size_Amount – Ret)
Used when calculated material amounts are multiplied by the load size to
determine amounts for the entire load.
M Moisture Second Group = Second Group - (First Group x Moisture Percent)
Used when moisture probes and manually entered moisture values use
SSD weights (where % moisture of the material is handled as free water).

02/09/10 126
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

1 Load Size (One) Second Group = Second Group - (First / (1 - %Moisture))

Used when moisture probes and manually entered moisture values use
Oven Dry weights (where the difference between the % moisture and %
absorption determine the free water for the material).
N No Load Size First Group = First Group x 1.00
Used for skipping the load size calculation for a group.
R Return Concrete First Group = First Group – Factor Amount
Used when a returned mix contains materials that can be used in the next
load. Typically pertains to the 2 CEM group.
S Slump First Group = First Group – (Change in Slump x Slump Factor)
Used to accommodate changes in slump caused by modifying the amount
of water or aggregates.
T Trim First Group = First Group – (Load Size x Trim Factor)
Used to automatically trim a material or admix design on Batch Setup.
Water can also be trimmed per yard and per load.
U Slurry Solids Second Group = Second Group + First Group x %Total Solids
Used to adjust for the amount of the solids in a slurry mix. Each solids
group to be adjusted must be listed on a separate row.
X Combination Combination of Based On and Correction Calculations.
Bases and corrects the amount of one Group based on the amount of
Ingredients in the same Group. The usual Groups affected by this
calculation are Cements or Waters. For example, Flyash can be based
on and also correct Cement.
Y Slurry First Group = First Group / (1 - %Total Solids)
Used to adjust the main water to account for the water in the slurry mix.
Note: The calculation that determines the amount of water in the slurry
mix is done before any adjustments for moisture and before
based-on calculations that consider water groups.
Z One LoadSize First Group = First Group x (Load Size_Amount – Ret)
Used when calculated material amounts are multiplied by the load size to
determine amounts for a material group in the load.

Internally, pounds are converted to kilograms for material calculations, and then
converted back into pounds. For these calculations, a Weight-to-Volume conversion
factor must be entered for the ingredient on the Ingredients screen.

02/09/10 127
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SLURRY CALCULATIONS
There are three methods for slurry calculations:
• Percentage substitution of slurry water against main water
• Absolute entry of slurry water amount in the mix design
• Mix slurry target specific gravity

Corrections against water can be made on either a Percentage or an Absolute basis.

For the Percentage method, corrections are made against the main (fresh) water. For
the Absolute method, the slurry water ingredient is entered as an absolute amount in
the mix design. This means there is no “based on” entry in the mix design. If more
than one type of water is used (i.e. fresh water, hot water and slurry water), the
system will still perform moisture and admix water corrections against the main
water.

For the Mix Slurry Target Specific Gravity method, the specific gravities of the
slurry water, slurry solids, and fresh water are used in calculations to meet the slurry
target specific gravity as entered in the mix.

SETUPS
• For the Percentage and Mix Slurry Target Specific Gravity methods to be
enabled and correction to occur, the “slurry water” ingredient must have the
following entries on the Ingredients screen:
“sg” in the Based On field.
A value in the Specific Gravity of Slurry Solids field.
The slurry ingredient needs to be part of the ‘3 WAT’ and ‘3 SLURRY’
groups.
• For the Absolute method, the slurry water ingredient is entered as an absolute
amount in the mix design. This means there is no “based on” entry in the mix
design.
• The solids portion of the Slurry can be used to adjust an aggregate or cement
material. This can be done with any of the slurry calculation methods mentioned
above.
• The “aggregate” material to be adjusted for slurry solids needs to be part of the ‘1
FINES’ group. The value in the Factor field of the Material Calculations screen is
used as the “percentage” to adjust the aggregate material in the slurry solids
calculation.

02/09/10 128
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

• The “cement” material to be adjusted for slurry solids needs to be part of the ‘2
FINES’ group. The value in the Factor field of the Material Calculations screen is
used as the “percentage” to adjust the cement material in the slurry solids
calculation.
• You should add a row to the Material Calculations screen with ‘U’ as the Type, ‘3
SLURRY’ as Group 1, and ‘2 FINES’ as Group 2.
• Since all corrections to water should be done to the “fresh water”, the row for ‘3
WAT’ with a ‘X’ as the Type should be moved up on the Material Calculations
screen.
• The Correction Weighting factor for water should be set to ‘1.00’ on the
Ingredients screen.

A typical setup for slurry calculations on the Material Calculations screen is shown next.

Recalculate
Position Group 1 Group 2 Type Factor Targets? Trace Comment
1 2 CEM 2 CEM X 0.000 N N
2 2 CEM 4 ADX B 0.000 N N
3 4 ADX 4 ADX E 0.000 N N
4 2 CEM F 0.000 N N
5 2 CEM R 1.000 N N
6 ALL T 0.000 N N
7 ALL A 0.000 N N
8 3 WAT 3 WAT X 0.000 N N
9 4 ADX 3 WAT C 1.000 N N
10 5 WATADX 3 WAT S 1.000 N N
11 5 WATADX 1 AGG S 0.000 N N
12 1 AGG 3 WAT M 0.000 Y N
13 3 SLURRY Y 0.000 N N
14 3 SLURRY 1 FINES U -1.000 N N
15 ALL L 0.000 N N

02/09/10 129
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CORRECTIONS BASED ON ICE

This feature allows Spectrum to correct the batching targets of a material or group of
materials based on the actual batching error(s) of another material or group of
materials. A typical use is the correction of water targets based on Ice weighing
errors.

For corrections based on Ice, the material calculation type “K” is used as shown in
the following sample screen.

Note: Calculations for Ice must be entered on the last line of the screen!

Recalculate
Position Group 1 Group 2 Type Factor Targets? Trace Comment
1 2 CEM 2 CEM X 0.000 N N
2 2 CEM 4 ADX B 0.000 N N
3 4 ADX 4 ADX E 0.000 N N
4 2 CEM F 0.000 N N
5 2 CEM R 1.000 N N
6 ALL T 0.000 N N
7 ALL A 0.000 N N
8 3 WAT 3 WAT X 0.000 N N
9 4 ADX 3 WAT C 1.000 N N
10 5 WATADX 3 WAT S 1.000 N N
11 5 WATADX 1 AGG S 0.000 N N
12 1 AGG 3 WAT M 0.000 Y N
13 3 SLURRY Y 0.000 N N
14 3 SLURRY 1 FINES U -1.000 N N
15 ALL L 0.000 N N
16 ICE ICE ADJ K 1.000 N N Must be the last line!

• Type “K” corrections are made to load targets. When a material is multi-
batched, corrections will be applied proportionately across the load.
• Ingredients in Group 1 must have a Batch Calculation Type of ‘n’ (entered on
the Ingredients screen). This type disables Group 1’s batch-to-batch material
corrections because Group 2 materials make the corrections.
• Ingredients in Group 2 must have a Batch Calculation Type of ‘N’ to allow
the Group 2 material (water, slurry water, etc.) to correct for errors in the
weigh up of Ice.
• Group 2 materials must not complete their feeds before ALL Group 1
materials have finished feeding. Depending on the system configuration, it
might be necessary to add a “Holdback” sequence for the Group 2 materials.

02/09/10 130
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CREATING MANUAL STATION LABELS

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ­MANUAL STATION LABELS. The
following selection box appears:

Left Buttons (A & B)

Right Buttons (C & D)
Left Scales
Right Scales

2. Select the set of labels you want to print or edit, and press [ENTER]. A screen with
blank label blocks appears for that set of labels.
3. You can create new labels or edit the default ones, which will appear if you select
“Manual Station 1 1 / 2” in the Name field. In either case, use the arrow, [TAB], or
[ENTER] keys to move to a label block, then enter text for that label.
4. After you have entered/edited all labels for this part of the Manual Station, press [F1]
to save your changes.
5. Ensure that the printer is turned on and that the paper tear-off is just above the print
head. Set the print quality to "NLQ" and the character pitch to "10." Make sure the
printer is in IBM emulation mode, not Epson emulation mode; otherwise, the borders
will not print correctly.
6. Press [F4] to print the labels for this part of the Manual Station.
7. Cut the labels along the lines provided on the printout.
8. Insert the label into the small slot on the edge of the Manual Station overlay. Widths
of the slots can vary slightly, so you may need to trim some labels.
9. Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for the other parts of the Manual Station panel.

NOTES:
ƒ Pressing [F8] deletes all labels for this part of the panel. Make sure this is what you
want to do before proceeding!
ƒ Pressing [F7] clears the text from all labels on the screen. Again, make sure this is
what you want to do.

02/09/10 131
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CREATING TICKET LAYOUTS (SCRIPTS)

This section explains how you can change the format and content of printed tickets.
We start with a description of the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen, followed by a
description of the Ticket Alias File. Then we give the general procedures for
creating and editing ticket scripts.

THE TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR SCREEN

Ticket scripts are created and modified on this screen. A ticket script controls “what”
is printed on a load ticket, as well as “where” it is printed. You must understand how
to use the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR before you begin creating or editing ticket
scripts.

The TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen is accessed by selecting MAIN MENU­SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE ­TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR. When this screen first appears, it is
blank. The example below shows the first page of a completed ticket script.

Ticket Layout Editor Screen

The table beginning on the next page explains the information you can enter into each
field of the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR. You can pull up a browse list for each field
except for the Column and Instance fields.

02/09/10 132
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION / ACTION

Line Line number on the printed ticket. The NL action described
below creates a new line. Each time you move the cursor
past a NL, the line number increments by one.
Of [ ] Name of the ticket script. Press [F2] to pull up a browse list
of ticket scripts (if any have been created).
Action Action to be taken when a ticket is to be printed. Can be
selected from a [F2] browse list. Some actions (e.g.,
PRINT) affect data fields in the Data column. Some
actions (e.g., NL) affect printer functions only.
Valid actions are:
PRINT – prints the data field listed under Data.
TEXT – prints user-defined text (captions, disclaimers,
etc.).
FF – executes a hard printer form feed.
NL – executes a hard printer new line command. Actions
listed after this command pertain to a new line on the ticket.
HL – executes a hard printer half-line (carriage return/half
linefeed).
RESALE+/- – begins and ends a loop for all resale items on
the ticket. Anything between RESALE+ and RESALE-
will be printed for each item on the resale product list. Use
this loop for descriptions, pricing, etc.
UNDER+/- – starts/stops the underlining of text.
BOLD+/- – starts/stops bold printing.
COMP+/- – starts/stops compressed printing. Compressed
printing is equal to 17 CPI on an Okidata 320.
WIDE+/- – starts/stops wide printing. Wide printing prints
one character in the space two characters normally occupy.
IF+/- – starts/stops a group of actions (usually PRINT).
The + starts the actions if the condition on that line is true.
The – stops the actions. IF+/- cannot be used within a
Resale Loop.
IF – single conditional statement. If the condition on the IF
line is true, the action listed on the next line takes place.

02/09/10 133
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION / ACTION

JUMP – instructs the printer to scroll to a designated line
number. This jump is absolute, not relative. This means
that if you specify JUMP 6, the printer will jump to line 6,
not 6 lines from the current position. If the specified line
has already been passed, this action will have no effect.
RESET – Use this at the top of the ticket. This sets the
printer to 10cpi, 6 lpi and draft mode. IBM emulation will
not change to the draft mode.
PRINT_ALT – converts the statement to the other
measurement system (US or Metric). If the statement
cannot be converted (e.g., bags), it will be printed as if the
action were PRINT.
6/8LPI – switches between 6 and 8 lines per inch.
RESALE_EX – keeps the system from duplicating a
product within the resale loop. This must be entered
directly before the RESALE+ action. You may enter up to
three of these exclusions per ticket.
REVERSE – performs a reverse linefeed. If batch weights
are to be printed, the system waits until they are printed
before it reverses. This is used for forms tear off.
Column Specifies the column on the ticket where the item listed
under Data will be printed. If this column number (plus the
length of the field to be printed) exceeds the Ticket Width
(entered in PRINTER SETUP), the system selects a lower
column number so the complete field can be printed. For
example, Ticket Width = 80 and you want to print the date
at column 75. The date is an 8-character field, so the
column would be adjusted to 72 and you would be warned
of this action. For actions that do not use columns, i.e.
RESALE+, the column number should always be 0.

02/09/10 134
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION / ACTION

Data Data to be printed on the ticket at the specified column.
Can be selected from the [F2] browse list.
• For the TEXT action, this data is the actual text to be
printed on the ticket (e.g., disclaimers).
• For the PRINT and PRINT_ALT actions, this data is
an “Alias” name for the actual database field. (See “The
Ticket Alias File.”)
• You can also enter basic math operators (‘+’ for
addition, ‘-‘ for subtraction, ‘*’ for multiplication, and
‘/’ for division) between the aliases for data fields.
Example:
PRINT 40 Prod_Ord-Prod_Del 0 p6.2
In this example, the amount to be delivered
(Product_Ordered – Product_Delivered) would be
printed in column 40. Up to 6 digits, including 2
decimal places could be printed. ‘0.00’ would be
printed for a zero value.
Instance Refers to a particular resale product within the order.
Delivery Charge is always instance 2. Mix Design is
always instance 1. For all Resale Loops, leave this field set
to 0. The system automatically increments through all
instances.
Format Several different formats are available, depending on the
type of data being printed on the ticket.

• Example of format for an alphanumeric string:

20 means the field can be no longer than 20 characters.

• Examples of formats for numeric strings:

8.2 means 8 digits with 2 decimal places.
p8.2 means 8 digits, 2 decimal places, and do not print
the number if it is equal to zero (0.000).
c8.2 means 8 digits, 2 decimal places, decimal point “,”,
separator “,”, and do not print the number if it is equal to
zero (0,000).
(Press [F2] from the Format field to see more examples.)

02/09/10 135
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

Sh-F4 Print Takes you to the PRINTER SETUP screen.
Setup
Sh-F8 Reprint Reprints the last ticket.
[F3] - CopyLine Places the contents of the current line in a stack, i.e.
clipboard. Not recommended.
[F4] - PutLine Places the contents of the stack, i.e. clipboard, into the
current line. Not recommended.
[F5] - InsLine Inserts a data line (not a ticket line). You must press
[ENTER] after selecting this function.
[F6] - DelLine Deletes the current data line. You must press [ENTER]
after selecting this function.
[F7] - Clear Clears the current screen.
[F8] - Delete Deletes the current ticket script.

02/09/10 136
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

THE TICKET ALIAS FILE

The Ticket Alias File allows you to assign “aliases” to database fields so you do not
have to memorize their formal names. This is helpful when you are creating a ticket
script. The Ticket Alias File is displayed when you press [Shift + F5] from the
TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR. An example of the Ticket Alias File is shown next.

Ticket Alias File

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Record Database table where the data field is stored.
Field Formal name of the database field. All fields available for
printing are displayed in this column.
Alias Alias name assigned to the database field. This is what you
enter in the Data field of the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR.
NOTE: Default aliases are assigned to some fields. For
others, you can assign your own. You can change the alias
for any field, however.
Type A for alphanumeric string
N for numeric (decimal point)
I for numeric (integer)
D for jam defined date – yy
Y for jam defined date – yyyy
C for condition

02/09/10 137
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

T for jam defined time – 12h

M for jam defined time – 24h
S for jam defined time – minsec
U for jam defined currency
Len Length of the data field.

ª TO ADD AN ALIAS NAME

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ­TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR.

2. Press [SHIFT + F5] from the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen. The Ticket
Alias File appears.
3. Move the cursor to the database field for which you want to create an alias
name. Move the cursor to the Alias column for this database field.
4. Type the alias name and press [ENTER].
5. Press [F1] to save the alias.

ª TO CHANGE AN ALIAS NAME

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ­TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR.

2. Press [SHIFT + F5] from the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen. The Ticket
Alias File appears.
3. Move the cursor to the alias name you want to change.
4. Type the new alias name and press [ENTER].
5. Press [F1] to save the new alias.

02/09/10 138
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CREATING A NEW TICKET SCRIPT

A ticket script controls “what” is printed on a load ticket, as well as “where” it is
printed. Normally, the top half of the ticket contains delivery information, followed
by product information. The bottom half contains the batch weights. (A sample
ticket is given at the end of this section.)

To create a ticket script:

1. Determine the order in which you wish information to be printed on load

tickets.
2. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ­TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR.
A blank TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen appears.
3. In the of [ ] field at the top of the screen, type the name of the new
ticket script. Press [ENTER] to move to the Action field.

(Delivery Information):
Using the screen example on the next page as a guide, do the following:

4. From the Action field, press [F2]. A list of valid actions appears. Select the
desired action (e.g., PRINT) from the list and press [ENTER]. That action
appears in the Action field. Press [ENTER] to move to the Column field.
5. Type the column number where you want this data to be printed on the ticket.
Press [ENTER] twice. The cursor moves to the Data field.
6. From the Data field, press [F2] to pull up the Ticket Alias File. Select the
desired database field and press [ENTER]. That field and its alias appear on
the TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen.
7. Press the Down Arrow key to move to the next line. Repeat Steps 4, 5 and 6
above for all Delivery Information you want to be printed on the ticket. Enter
NL when you want the data to be printed on a new line of the ticket.

02/09/10 139
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Delivery Information on Ticket Script

(Product Information):
Using the screen example on the next page as a guide, do the following:

8. Enter a NL action immediately after the Delivery Information. Arrow down

to the next action line and enter RESALE+ and press [ENTER]. Press
[ENTER] to move to the Data field.
9. In the Data field for this first line of Product Information, enter the “trigger”
for the Resale Loop. This is usually “Product Load Size.” Press [ENTER].
The cursor moves to the Action field for the next data field.
10. Enter PRINT for this action and press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the
Column field.
11. Enter the column number where you want this data to be printed on the ticket.
Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Data field.
12. Enter the next data field to be printed for Product Information. Press
[ENTER] three times. This bypasses the Instance and Format fields and
moves the cursor to the Action field for the next data field. (Notice that the
field length is automatically entered in the Format field.)
13. Repeat Steps 10, 11, and 12 above for all product information you want
printed on the ticket. Enter NL when you want the data to be printed on a
new line of the ticket.
14. When you have entered all product information, enter RESALE- on the next
available Action line.
15. Press [F1] to save the ticket script. The system assigns a .y extension to the
script name.

02/09/10 140
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Product Information on Ticket Script

02/09/10 141
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SPECIFYING WHICH TICKET SCRIPT TO USE

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­PRINTER SETUP.
2. Verify that the Node for which you wish to assign a ticket script is selected.
If not, change the node field to reflect the desired node.
3. Select the Ticket Script Name(s) field.
4. Type the name of the ticket name you wish to print in this field. The ticket
name must be preceded by a –t and ended with a .y.
5. Press [F1] to save your entry.

EDITING AN EXISTING TICKET SCRIPT

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR. A
blank TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR screen appears.
2. Press [F2] to browse the ticket name field.
3. Highlight the ticket script you wish to edit and press [ENTER]. The ticket
script appears on the screen.
4. When editing, remember that information is printed in the order it is entered
on this screen. Use the [F5] – Insert Line and the [F6] – Delete Line
functions as appropriate.
5. Press [F1] to save your changes.

02/09/10 142
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

PRINTER SETUP SCREEN

In the previous section, we learned how to create ticket scripts which control “what”
to print on tickets, as well as “where” to print it. In this section, we discuss the
PRINTER SETUP screen, which gives you even more control over ticket printing. On
this screen, you can do the following:

• Change the length and width of the ticket page.

• Select which ticket script to use.

• Choose to print or not to print delivery information on the top half of the ticket.

• Cause the system to prompt you for a truck code before discharge can commence.

• Save or not save batch weights to floppy disk.

• Choose to print batch weights for each weigh cycle of a multi-batch load.

• Include/exclude individual items from the batch weights portion of the ticket.

Note: To prevent batch weights from printing on tickets, you must set the Batch
Code field of the BATCH SETUP screen to B. To allow batch weights
printing, leave this field set to Y.

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­PRINTER SETUP. A blank

PRINTER SETUP screen appears with the cursor on the Node Number field.
2. Press [F2] to pull up a list of nodes. Select the appropriate node and press
[ENTER]. The screen will then look something like the one shown next.

Printer Setup Screen

02/09/10 143
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELDS – PRINTER SETUP SCREEN

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Node Number Spectrum batch computer being configured.
Default Login User User login to appear when this node is booted up.
Code
Record Batch Y means save batch weights to hard disk. N means do not
Weights to Disk? save batch weights to hard disk.

Print Top Half of Y means print delivery and product information. N means
Ticket? do not print delivery and product information (only print
batch weights).
Record Log? Y means enable the logging printer selected on MAIN
MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­PLANTS.
Ticket Page Length Number of lines from top to bottom of ticket. 66 is the
default.
Ticket Page Width Number of characters that can be printed from left to right
on the ticket. 80 is the default.

02/09/10 144
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Ticket Script Name(s) Ticket script to be used for printing tickets. Press [F2] from
this field to pull up two lists of flags. Flags in the first list
are replacement scripts. You can type one of these flags
directly before the script name.
Example: -t alkon.y

-t top of the ticket script(s).

-w batch weights script(s).
-l log script(s).
-m mixer script(s).
-b batch weights to disk script(s).

Flags in the second list determine when the top of the ticket
will be printed. You can type one of these flags directly
after the script name.
Example: -t alkon.y –5

-3 print at LOAD START -6 print at LOAD MIX

-4 print at LOAD WEIGH -7 print at LOAD DONE
-5 print at LOAD DISCHARGE

Only one numbered ticket print flag may be specified. The

default value is print at LOAD START
Usually the default settings should not be changed.

The following flags can also be entered:

-F forces the system to always prompt you for a truck code
before starting discharge
-T causes the system to prompt you for a truck code before
starting discharge only if the Truck field of the Batch
Setup screen is blank.
Example: -t alkon.y –5 -F
Set EPSON mode? Y means use Epson printer emulation. N means do not.

02/09/10 145
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MULTI-BATCH PRINTING
You can set the system to print batch weights for each weigh cycle of a multi-
batch load (some states require this). This is accomplished as follows:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­PRINTER SETUP. A blank

PRINTER SETUP screen appears with the cursor on the Node Number field.
2. Press [F2] to pull up a list of nodes. Select the appropriate node and press
[ENTER].
3. In the Ticket Script Name(s) field, enter -w to print batch weights, or leave
this field blank to print one set of batch weights for the entire load.
4. Press [F1] to save the data.

SELECTING BATCH WEIGHT ITEMS FOR PRINTING

The information printed in the batch weights section of the ticket (or on batch weight
reports) is selected on the Batch Weight Options screen (shown next), which is accessed
by pressing [F3] from the System Maintenance¤Printer Setup screen.

To select an option, move the cursor to that line and type a ‘Y’ over the ‘N’. Be sure to
press [F1] to save your selections. (For a description of the more common batch weight
information, see “Batch Weights”.)

Batch Weight Options – Page 1

02/09/10 146
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Batch Weight Options – Page 2

Note: The “Print Batched UOM” flag must be set to “Y” so that printed
scale or meter values use the same UOM as their respective
measuring devices. This is a requirement for state inspections.

02/09/10 147
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BAR CODE PRINTING

You can cause bar codes to be printed on tickets (top portion) by entering literal
strings on the Ticket Layout Editor screen. This feature uses the built-in bar code
support found in many printers.

The following table shows the Bar Code Types that can be printed on the OKI 320
Turbo 9-Pin dot matrix printer, and on the Lexmark laser printer.

Bar Code OKI 320 Lexmark Max Data Prints

Type Turbo 9 Pin Size Alphanumeric
EAN 8 Y Y 8 N
EAN 13 Y Y 13 N
UPC A Y Y 12 N
UPC E Y N 6 N
Code 39 Y Y 43 Y1
Code 128 Y Y 50 Y2
Interleaved 2/5 Y Y 50 N
ZIP Code Y Y 9 N

1
Code 39 prints the following character set:
123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ-. $/+%
2
Code 128 prints from one of three subsets (A,B,C). Refer to the printer manual
for details.

ª EXAMPLE: PRINTING A BAR-CODE TICKET NUMBER

The following example prints a bar-coded ticket number starting at position 67 on the
“top” part of the ticket. All codes are shown in decimal values. The “@” following
the ticket_number tells the printer to calculate and print the checksum value. Note
that the number of data bytes specified in the Print Bar Code escape sequence is
eight. This includes the 7-digit ticket number (with required leading zeros) and the @
sign.
Note: If a bar code is required at the “bottom” of the ticket, then the same sequence
of characters can be output from within the vweights2, bwv_vw2 or other
script. Contact Command Alkon Support Services if you need this kind of
functionality.

BAR CODE ESCAPE SEQUENCE

Enter the following sequence shown between a set of <L>…</L> delimiters

on the Ticket Layout Editor to tell Spectrum that bar codes are going to be
printed.

02/09/10 148
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Bytecode Use
27
16 Select bar code escape sequence
65
8 Number of data bytes following
0 n1 Bar Code Type Selection
1 n2
0 n3 Vertical Height of the bar code
3 n4
1 n5 Width of one barcode character (0 .. 7)
1 n6 Ignored for EAN8
1 n7 Wide to Narrow ratio settings (0 .. 7)
2 n8 Print quality of plain writing.

PRINT BAR CODE ESCAPE SEQUENCE

Enter the following sequence between a set of <L>…</L> delimiters on the

Ticket Layout Editor to tell the printer to print bar codes.

Bytecode Use
27
16 Print Barcode escape sequence
66
8 Number of data bytes following

TICKET LAYOUT EDITOR ENTRIES

The following example shows all of the entries needed on the Ticket Layout
Editor for printing the bar-coded ticket number.

Action Column Data Instance Format

TEXT 67 <L>27 16 65 8 0 1 0 3 1 1 1 2</L>

TEXT 67 <L>27 16 66 8</L>
PRINT 67 Ticket_Number 07
TEXT 67 @

02/09/10 149
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CONFIGURING A PRINTER
After you have set up your ticket format and script, you are ready to connect the
printer and configure it.

TO SET UP A PRINTER
1. Connect the printer to the appropriate port (usually the first parallel port) on
the Spectrum computer. Plug the power cord into the appropriate electrical
outlet.
2. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ­PORT PARAMETERS. The
screen shown below appears.

Port Parameter for a Printer

Note: The Port Parameters screen is also used for configuring other devices
such as a Remote Scale Display or Water Controller.
3. Using the example above and the field descriptions on the following pages,
configure the printer. Normally, this is done at the factory.

02/09/10 150
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS – PORT PARAMETERS SCREEN

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Parameter Name Browseable field. Name of the device to which you want to
send information.
Useable? Yes/No field indicating whether this device can be used on
the PLANTS screen. “Y” is the default.
Node Node to which this device is connected. “1” is the default.
File or Device Browseable field. Enter either “F” for file, or “D” for a port
device such as a printer. “D” is the default.
File Path/Name Browseable field. Path to file on the hard drive where
information is to be sent. You may enter your own file path
or select a predefined one from the browse list. Do not
enter the Node number. Default is blank.
NOTE: If you enter your own file path/name, the
directories you enter must already exist on the hard drive.
The Spectrum will not create them.
Serial/Parallel Browseable field. Port type: “S” for serial, or “P” for
parallel. Default is “P.” For a dial-up serial printer or a
directly connected printer, select “S.” For a parallel printer,
select “P.”
Device Name Browseable field which displays a list of parallel and serial
ports. Default is “/dev/par1” for the first parallel port. The
ports on the back of the computer are labeled appropriately.
Protocol Browseable field. Form in which data is sent or received.
“R” is the default. Choices are:
R – Raw (used for printing tickets and reports normally)
L – Link-20 (for sending data to Spectrum Ver. 4.x)
U – Universal (for sending data over a Universal Interface)
B – Boral (for sending data over a Boral Interface)
I – Incoming (for receiving data via a Link-20 interface)
S – Score Board
H – Hanson
W – Water Controller
D – Scale Display

02/09/10 151
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Tracepoints? This field determines whether tracepoints are enabled and
recorded in the Error file (for debugging). Options are:
Y – enable Tracepoints.
N – do not enable Tracepoints.
V – enable Tracepoints and provide more details in the
Error file. (The ‘V’ is short for ‘Verbose’.)
Flow Control Browseable field. Type of handshaking used by the device.
S – for XOn/Xoff software handshaking
H – for RTS/CTS hardware handshaking
NOTE: RTS/CTS means Ready To Send / Clear To Send
Line Type Browseable field. “P” for a direct connection, or “D” for a
dial-up connection (phone line).
Multi-Drop? Yes/No field that indicates whether the plant has dedicated
phone lines for data transfer that are specially installed by
the phone company, and that do not require any dialing, but
connect automatically upon being used. A CAS switch is
very useful with this type of phone line.
Hex Convert? Yes/No field. Used only with the Boral link and sets
whether transmissions are converted from ASCII codes to
hexadecimal numbers. Example: Instead of a one-byte ‘A’
character, a two-byte hex number ‘41’ is transmitted.
Bin Crc ? Yes/No field. Sets whether the CRC is in binary form. For
example, if the CRC for a message is 254, then 254 is
assigned to the one CRC byte; otherwise, the CRC would be
in an ASCII hexadecimal format in two bytes. This option
can only be used if the serial port/modem connection has
hardware flow control enabled. It will cause a software
flow controlled connection to fail because the CRC may
then take a value that is the same as XON or XOFF.
No Crc ? Yes/No field. Sets whether CRC calculations or tests are
performed for a transmission.
Reversed Crc ? Yes/No field. Sets whether the byte order of the ASCII
CRC is switched. This has no effect on the binary CRC.
No Limit ? Yes/No field. Ulink maintains an internal queue of tickets
that it receives. With No Limit enabled, if the queue is full
and a new ticket arrives, the earliest ticket is removed.
NOTE: With recent changes, this option is obsolete.
No Wait ACK ? Yes/No field. Sets whether the system disregards the
receipt of acknowledgements.

02/09/10 152
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Baud Rate Browseable field. Amount of information transmitted in
bits per second. A bit is a binary unit of information (a “0”
or a “1”). Default is “9600.”
NOTE: Be sure the modem and serial port can transmit
data at the baud rate selected.
Data Bits Browseable field. Number of data bits sent between stop
bits. Choices are “6,” “7,” and “8.” The default is “8.”
Parity Browseable field. Parity is used for error checking to
ensure that no information is lost in transmission. Default is
“N.”
Choices are:
N – None
O – Odd
E – Even
M – Mark
S – Space
Stop Bits Browseable field. Number of bits that act as markers
between the data bits. Choices are “1” or “2.” The default
is “1.”
Duplex Browseable field. Duplex setting for serial printers
connected to PCs. Default is “F.” Choices are:
F – Full (PC echoes commands you type)
H – Half (feature is turned off)
DTR/DSR? Yes/No field that enables/disables DTR/DSR hardware
handshaking for this device. DTR/DSR stands for Data
Terminal Ready / Data Send Ready.
RTS Delay Length of time, in milliseconds, the PC sends a “ready to
send” signal to the device. Default is 250 milliseconds
(ms).
NOTE: Set this time to less than the Timeout Delay;
otherwise the connection may be abruptly ended before all
of the information has been transferred to the port device.
CTS Delay Length of time, in milliseconds, the device sends a “clear to
send” signal to the PC. Default is 250 milliseconds (ms).
NOTE: Set this time to less than the Timeout Delay;
otherwise the connection may be abruptly ended before all
of the information has been transferred to the port device.

02/09/10 153
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Time Delay Length of time, in milliseconds, the sending device waits for
the receiving device to respond before the sending device
disconnects itself. Default is 3000 ms.
NOTE: Set this time higher than the RTS and CTS
Delays; otherwise the connection may be abruptly ended
before all of the information has been transferred to the port
device.
Dialing Retries Used only if Line Type is “D” (for dial-up line). Number
of times the system will attempt to dial the line if the
previous attempt was unsuccessful. Default is “2.”
Connect Delay Number of seconds the system will ring the line trying to
establish a connection. Default is 10 seconds.
Hangup Delay Number of seconds the system will hold the line open. This
should be set high enough to ensure that tickets and reports
have completed printing. Default is 60 seconds.
Init/Format Command codes necessary to initialize this printer. Used
primarily to advance and retreat paper, change fonts, etc.,
especially for serial dial-up printers. Default is a blank
entry.
NOTE:
Modem Init, Phone Number, and Hangup String are used only if Line Type = D.

Modem Init Command codes necessary for the modem to be initialized.

Check the manual for the modem for the correct codes.
Default is “ATZ.”
Phone Number Phone number of this destination device if this is a dial-up
printer, and the codes needed to open the phone line and
start a dial tone. Default is “ATDT.”
Hangup String Command codes necessary for the modem to stop
transmitting and hang up the phone line. Default is “+++.”

4. On the PLANT screen (shown next), select the appropriate printer for the
Ticket, Report, Logging, and any other device destinations.

Note: Descriptions of fields on the PLANT screen begin on the next page.

02/09/10 154
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Plant Screen

5. From any Spectrum screen, press [CTRL + P] to print a copy of the screen.
If the screen is printed correctly, the printer is ready to use. You can also use
[CTRL + P] to print a report to test the printer, although there probably won’t
be any data except for the headers, etc.

ª FIELDS – PLANT SCREEN

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Name Name assigned to this plant. Browseable field.
Code Code assigned to this plant. Browseable field.
Color Browseable list of colors (by number) that you can assign
to trucks assigned to this plant. This also changes the
color of the Run bar at the top of the screen. There are
15 colors from which to choose. Each of the 15 numbers
across the top of the screen is displayed in the color
associated with that number. The browse list gives a text
description of the color for each number.
Next Ticket Number Next ticket number that will be used for this plant. This
number can be up to six digits long. You only need to
change this number when you want to start numbering
tickets all over again from zero.
Loading Time Default loading time, in minutes, for trucks at this plant.
Washdown Time Default washdown time, in minutes, for trucks at this
plant.

02/09/10 155
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Startup Time Default startup time, in minutes, for this plant. Startup
time includes morning tasks needed to get the plant ready
for batching (starting equipment, computers, etc.).
Cleanout Time Default cleanout time, in minutes, for this plant.
Cleanout time includes tasks needed to get plant
equipment ready for shutdown (cleaning chutes and
mixers, turning off the power, etc.).
Batching Node Node number of the PC that controls batching for this
plant.
Remote Plant? Select one of the following:
Y (for Yes) – if there is a remote batching PC.
N (for No) – if there is no remote batching PC.
V (for Virtual) – if you want to use two different ticket
formats for the same plant.
Calculate Targets for Yes/No field that indicates whether the Mini-Dispatch
Remote Plant? will calculate net material targets for tickets not batched
at plants using Version 6 Spectrum.
Weighmaster through Weighmaster name and employer information.
Zip Code fields
Batch on Receipt? Batch on Receipt type used. Choices are:
N Not Enabled
Y Enabled
L Link Tickets Only
D Demands
d Demands Debug
Destination Name
Determines where the following information is sent or printed. These are
browseable lists of port destinations (from the Port Parameters screen). To modify a
port destination, select it and press [F4] to pull it up on the Port Parameters screen.
Ticket Destination device for tickets.
Report Destination device for reports.
Logging Destination device for logs of each order.
Remote Destination device for batches controlled by a remote
system.
Alt Ticket Destination device for alternate tickets. The Spectrum
can be configured to print two different pre-printed
tickets from one plant with the same ticket format.

02/09/10 156
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Scoreboard Destination port for information sent to a Scoreboard.
(Note: This port is configured on the Port Parameters
screen.)
Dispatch Status
Enable Auto Truck to Yes/No field that sets whether trucks automatically
Loading advance from the ‘ticketed’ to the ‘loading status’ on the
Dispatch screen.
Enable Auto Truck to Yes/No field that sets whether trucks automatically
Washdown advance from ‘loading’ to the ‘washdown’ status on the
Dispatch screen.
Default User Code Default user for this plant. Only orders for this plant will
be displayed. To display all orders for all plants, leave
this field blank.
Alternate Plant Name The Spectrum can be configured to print to two different
pre-printed tickets from one plant with the same ticket
format. The Alternate Plant Name and Alt Ticket
fields are used for this purpose.
Master Plant Code This field only appears if ‘V’, for Virtual, is selected in
the Remote Plant field. In this field, select the master, or
“real” plant code.

02/09/10 157
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INVENTORY

OVERVIEW OF SPECTRUM INVENTORY FUNCTIONS

Spectrum provides access to inventory and usage data for all ingredients and products
in the database. The following table gives a quick overview of how to access this
information. NOTE: Access information for ingredient inventory and usage data is
not included in the table because it is discussed in detail in the remainder of this
section.

Ingredient Inventory Levels (Discussed in detail in this section.)

Ingredient Usage Data (Discussed in detail in this section.)
Usage for a Single Mix Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­MIX
Design DESIGNS. Select a code. Make sure the
Inventory? field is set to Y. Press
[ENTER]. Usage data for the selected mix
design appears in the lower-right portion of
the screen.
Usage for All Mix Designs Select MAIN MENU­REPORTS­MIX
DESIGN LISTING and press [ENTER]. The
report is generated and sent to the printer.
Inventory For a Single Select MAIN MENU­DATA
Resale Product ENTRY­RESALE PRODUCTS.
List of All Resale Products Select MAIN MENU­REPORTS ­RESALE
PRODUCT LISTING and press [ENTER].
The list is generated and sent to the printer.
Log of Manually Batched Select MAIN MENU­REPORTS ­MANUAL
Ingredients MATERIAL MONITOR.

02/09/10 158
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INGREDIENT INVENTORY LEVELS – “SINGLE” PLANT

To view ingredient inventory levels (for a single plant):

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­UPDATE INVENTORY. A sub-menu

appears, giving you the option of choosing one of the following views: Daily
Inventory, Weekly Inventory, Monthly Inventory, or Yearly Inventory.
2. Select the desired view. The ON-HAND LEVELS BY PLANT screen (shown
next) is displayed. In the example below, the weekly view is selected. All
“views” contain the same type of information, except for the total amount
batched.

On Hand Levels By Plant

3. If you need to look at inventory for another plant, press [F2] from the Plant
field to pull up a browse list, select the desired plant and press [ENTER].

02/09/10 159
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS
• The Date and Time Last Cleared field shows when the inventory levels were last
cleared and updated (see “Clearing Inventory.”)
• The Total Batched field shows the total yards batched by the plant for the
selected period (daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly).
• The Ingredient, Location, and On Hand fields are self-explanatory. They show
the ingredient, its location (bin, silo, etc.), and its current on hand amount.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F3] - Incoming Pulls up the Incoming Inventory box so you can receive
incoming inventory.
[F4] - Convert Displays inventory in the alternate units of measure. Press
this key again to return to the original units of measure.
[F5] - Detail Pulls up the DETAILED USAGE BY PLANT screen.
[F6] - Sys Ttl Pulls up the USAGE BY MATERIAL screen, which shows
total ingredient usage for all plants for the selected
inventory period.
[F7] - Reset Causes the On Hand amounts of all mix design ingredients
to be reset to “zero” balances.

INGREDIENT INVENTORY LEVELS – “ALL” PLANTS

To view ingredient inventory for all plants:

1. Select MAIN MENU ­REPORTS­INGREDIENT LISTING and press [ENTER].

2. The inventory list is sent to the printer (or to a file if this was specified on the
PLANTS screen).

02/09/10 160
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INGREDIENT USAGE DATA – “SINGLE” PLANT

To view ingredient usage data (for a single plant):

NOTE: This list includes ingredients manually batched. To view a log of

manually batched ingredients only, select MAIN MENU
­REPORTS­MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR, then select the
date(s).

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­UPDATE INVENTORY. A sub-menu

appears, giving you the option of choosing one of the following views: Daily
Inventory, Weekly Inventory, Monthly Inventory, or Yearly Inventory.
2. Select the desired view. The ON-HAND LEVELS BY PLANT screen is
displayed.
3. Press [F5] – Detail to pull up the DETAILED USAGE BY PLANT screen (shown
next).

Detailed Usage By Plant

02/09/10 161
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS
• The Required field shows target weight totals for each ingredient for the selected
inventory period.
• The Auto-Batched field shows the total system-batched weight for each
ingredient for the selected inventory period.
• The Error (%) field shows the total of the error percentage for each ingredient
for the selected inventory period. (Error (%) is the percentage auto-batched over
or under target.)
• The Manual field shows the totals manually batched for each ingredient for the
selected inventory period.

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F3] - Adjust Allows you to adjust the Required and Auto-Batched
amounts for an ingredient. NOTE: To prevent
unauthorized use, all adjustments to inventory are recorded
in the Incoming Inventory Log.
[F4] - Convert Displays amounts in the alternate units of measure. Press
this key again to return to the original units of measure.
[F6] - Sys Ttl Pulls up the USAGE BY MATERIAL screen, which shows
total ingredient usage for all plants for the selected
inventory period.

INGREDIENT USAGE DATA – “ALL” PLANTS

To view ingredient usage for all plants:

1. Press [F6] from either the ON-HAND LEVELS BY PLANT or the DETAILED
USAGE BY PLANT screen.
2. Press [SHIFT + F4] to see usage data for the next inventory period (Daily,
Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly).

02/09/10 162
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

RECORDING INCOMING INVENTORY - INGREDIENTS

NOTE: To record incoming inventory of Resale Products, see “Resale
Products.”

To record incoming inventory:

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­UPDATE INVENTORY­DAILY

INVENTORY.
2. Move the cursor to the ingredient for which you wish to record incoming
inventory.
3. Press [F3] – Incoming. The screen shown next appears with the cursor on the
Adjustment Amount field.

Incoming Inventory

4. Enter the amount of incoming inventory and any other pertinent information
(supplier, truck, hauler, etc.).
NOTE: If the On Hand Amount and Adjustment Amount fields do not
show the correct inventory units, press [F3] to go to the
INGREDIENTS screen, where you can set the correct inventory units.
5. Press [F1] to save your entry and update this ingredient’s on-hand amount.
6. Press [ESC] to go back to the inventory screen. Repeat Steps 2 through 5
above for each ingredient for which you need to receive inventory.

02/09/10 163
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves changes and returns you to the Daily Inventory
screen.
[F3] - Ingredients Takes you to the INGREDIENTS screen.
[F4] - Incoming Log Pulls up a log of each adjustment made to inventory
amounts.
[F7] - Reset Causes the On Hand amount of the currently selected
ingredient to be reset to a “zero” balance.

CLEARING INVENTORY
The recommended way to clear inventory is to run the End of Day procedure.
The Clear and Reset . . . Inventory field of the “End of” setup screens must be
set to Y, however. (See “End of Day Procedures” for more information.)

An alternate way to clear inventory is to press [F7] from the ON-HAND LEVELS
BY PLANT screen, enter Y for the appropriate inventory period (s), and press [F1].
This method can be used if you clear inventory more than once a day.

02/09/10 164
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SETTING UP USER ACCOUNTS

The USER SETUP screen is used to add new users and to set passwords. Only users
with proper permissions can access this screen (see “User Security”).

Other uses for this screen include setting the display colors for dispatched orders and
load statuses, and setting other times and flags for dispatched orders.

User Setup Screen

To add a new user account:

1. Select Main Menu > System Maintenance > Users. The User Setup screen
(shown above) appears.
2. Enter a User Code. This code can be no longer than 10 letters.
3. Tab down to the Name field and enter the first and last name of the new user.
4. Tab down and enter a Password (up to 6 characters in length).
5. Fill in the rest of the USER SETUP screen, using the field descriptions table on
the following pages as a guide.
6. Press <F1> to save the new user data and password.

02/09/10 165
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FIELDS – USER SETUP SCREEN

FIELD DESCRIPTION
User Code Browseable field. 10-letter code name for the user.
Name First and last name of the user.
Password User’s password. Up to 6 characters. To change an existing
user’s password, select the user code, type the new password
here, then press [F1] to save the new password.
Plant Name Browseable field. 2-character name for the default plant of the
user. This field is used by the Plants screen to determine where
reports should be printed.
Display Orders Determines when orders appear on the Dispatch screen. Default
Lead Time is 180 minutes, which means the order appears on the Dispatch
screen 3 hours before the order’s first truck should be loaded.
Display Graph On Yes/No field that sets whether the Graph screen is automatically
Run Button? displayed when the [F9] – RUN button is pressed.
Sort Order Index Yes/No field that sets whether the Order Index will have its
By Order Code? orders sorted by Order Code or by the projected time for the next
load on the order.
Sequence Code Default sequence code to use when this user enters an order.
Batch on Receipt? Yes/No field that sets whether to batch tickets as soon as they
are received from the dispatching computer.
Reset Loading on Yes/No field.
error? Y – Resets the Discharge Authorize key <F11> to “Off”
whenever an error occurs during batching and Discharge
Authorize is armed.
N – The state of the Discharge Authorize key <F11> will remain
unchanged whenever an error occurs during batching.
Allow reordering of Yes/No field that sets whether you can change the order of
loads on Load Index unbatched loads on the Load Index screen (by pressing [CTRL
Screen +↑] to move a load up, or [CTRL + ↓] to move a load down the
list.

02/09/10 166
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Load Stack User Browseable field. Sets which additional information is
Defined Field n displayed on the Load Index. Choices are:
1 Job name
(n = 1 or 2) 2 Job Address
3 Notes
4 Delivery Instructions
5 User Defined Field
6 Load ID
7 Returned Amt and Mix
8 Customer Name
9 Dispatch Ticket Number
Show Loads on Browseable field. Sets which plant’s loads will be displayed on
Load Index by Plant the Load Index for this user.
Show Batch Loads Yes/No field that sets whether batched loads are displayed on
on Load Index the Load Index for this user.
Enforce Based On • If this field is set to Yes and an ingredient has been assigned
Check a "Based On" unit, users can only edit the ingredient's
"Based On" amount on the Mix Designs screen.
• If this field is set to No, the system operates as normal and
allows the user to enter either an Absolute or a Based On
value, not both.
Dispatch Order Browseable fields. Sets the color in which orders are displayed,
Colors depending on their statuses. There are 15 colors to choose from.
Load Index Load Browseable fields. Sets the colors in which loads will be
Colors displayed on the Load Index, depending on their statuses. There
are 15 colors to choose from.

02/09/10 167
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

USER SECURITY
The USER SECURITY SETUP screen is used to prohibit access to certain parts of the
system. For example, you can limit an Order Entry user’s access to the Customers,
Sales Tax Rates, Resale Products, Projects, Orders, and Tickets screens.

Select Main Menu > System Maintenance > Users then press <F4> to access the
USER SECURITY SETUP screen.

Spectrum comes with three pre-defined user accounts: ALKON, MANAGER, and
USER. (ALKON has been selected in the User Code field in the following screen
example. Notice that this user account has full access to the system.)

User Security Setup – Alkon

For each screen or function listed on this screen, an “N” prevents access and a “Y”
allows access (except for “Disable Load Index Editing” – an “N” here actually allows
Load Index editing).

NOTE: Do not deny access to “User Login Screen” if you want the user to be able to
login with another user code and change their access privileges.

02/09/10 168
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

If you select “MANAGER” in the User Code field, the following screen appears with
fewer access rights than the ALKON user. For instance, a manager would not need
access to order entry, customers, and other database screens. He/she would, however,
need access to reports and inventory screens.

User Security Setup – Manager

If you select “USER” in the User Code field, the following screen appears with
another set of access rights (Load Index, Batch Setup, Price, End of Day, etc.).

User Security Setup – Alkon

02/09/10 169
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCHING OPERATIONS

INTRODUCTION
Batching consists of two parts. The first part is the Batching Cycle, where materials
are weighed or metered into scales, holding hoppers or bottles. The second part is the
Discharge Cycle, where the scales and holding hoppers or bottles are discharged into
a truck or mixer, and where direct-metered admixes and water are normally added.

We will start with a general discussion of these two cycles, including some of the
technical terms used in concrete batching. Next, we will briefly discuss how to run
an automatic batch. (For a discussion of manual batching, see the E-Z Cal User’s
Manual.)

Then, we will discuss the screens used in the batching process (ORDER ENTRY, LOAD
INDEX, ORDER INDEX, BATCH SETUP, and GRAPH). Most of the details about
batching (order entry, calculating dimensions, adjusting batch information, etc.) are
contained in the discussions of these screens.

ª BATCHING CYCLE

All materials for each scale or meter, except for those that are metered directly into
the truck or mixer, are batched into their respective scales, hoppers, or bottles during
the Batching Cycle. To batch manually, you must feed one material at a time. To
batch automatically, however, you can call up pre-defined formulas, then let the
Spectrum System control feeding, weigh-up, and discharge.

Scales and admix bottles should be empty. Each scale should be within a range of
true zero (an amount between the Zero Tolerance Over and Zero Tolerance Under
values set on the SCALES screen for that scale). Zero Tolerance is not used for
admixes. Admix holding bottles normally send “bottle empty” signals back to the
Spectrum System to indicate they are ready.

ª PREACT

In a typical gravity-fed batch plant, the feeding of aggregate material is stopped at a

point short of the target weight to compensate for airborne material that has not
reached the scale. This is referred to as Preact. For example, if the end target is
1000 pounds, and 100 pounds of free fall material is anticipated, the Preact value
would be 100. The column of airborne material grows shorter as the pile in the scale
grows taller – meaning Preact is smaller for large batch sizes.

02/09/10 170
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª FEED TYPES

In general, the system attempts, first, to Fast Feed then Time Feed and, finally, Jog
Feed to arrive as close as possible to the requested Target. During each “feed type,”
the system makes calculations based on parameters and previously learned
information for the feed type.

FAST FEED
Before Fast Feed starts, a “Safe Target” is calculated by adding the requested Target
to the Scale Start Tare then subtracting the Fast Feed Plant Erraticness and Preact
values. The Safe Target is less than the requested Target, so that fast feeding does
not overshoot the requested Target.

Note: If no Preact Overide is set and a learned Preact is not available, the Default
Preact value is used.

Fast Feed begins if Fast Feed is enabled for the bin and the Safe Target is greater than
the Minimum to Fast Feed value. Initially, Fast Feed conditionality opens multiple
gates and continuously monitors the scale for the amount left to feed. When the
amount left to feed reaches the Extra Gate Shutoff value (if enabled), the second gate
is closed. The first gate is closed when the Safe Target value is reached.

Note: When a feed’s Safe Target is less than the Minimum to Fast Feed value, Fast
Feed is skipped and the system goes directly to Timed Feed.

TIMED FEED

Timed Feed is a timed opening of a single gate for a time duration based on the
previous Flow Rates for the bin and material. If Timed Feed is enabled and the
amount left to feed is greater than the Minimum to Time Feed value, the system
calculates a time duration to open the gate.

As with Fast Feed, a Safe Target is calculated based on the amount left to feed minus
the Timed Feed Plant Erraticness percentage or absolute value. Multiple Timed
Feeds can occur up to the Maximum Number of Timed Feeds value.

JOG FEED

Jog Feed is typically used for aggregates and cements and opens and closes the gate
enough to allow small jog bites of material to fall through. The time duration the gate
opens and closes depends on the Jog Weight, Jog Time and Jog Settle Time values.

The system automatically adjusts the Jog Time by the Jog Time Adjust value to
achieve the Jog Weight per jog.
Jog Feed can start if ALL of the following are true:

02/09/10 171
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

• Jog Feed is enabled.

• Fast and/or Timed Feed finishes without getting the material to target.
• The Maximum Number of Jogs is a non-zero value.

ª MULTI-BATCHING

Some plants must make several small batches because of limited batching capacity.
To solve this problem, the Spectrum divides a load into smaller batches if the load
amount exceeds the maximum batch size set for the system. Once started, batching
continues until the entire load is batched.

ª FEED SEQUENCING

Sequencing gives you complete control over the feeding of ingredients. Feed
sequences define when a device starts and stops, and the quantity of material that
should be fed. A separate sequence is created for each device. Many conditions can
be set for sequences, making any discussion of this topic a difficult one. One simple
condition could be that the completion of feeding of one ingredient could trigger the
start of feeding of another ingredient.

Only qualified personnel should create or edit sequences. For these reasons, this
Guide does not discuss how to create sequences. (If you have any questions about
sequencing, please contact your Quality Control representative or call the Command
Alkon Service Department.

02/09/10 172
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª DISCHARGE CYCLE

After all ingredients with holding facilities (scales, bottles, or holding hoppers) have
been weighed up, they can be discharged into a truck or mixer. There are two kinds
of discharge: (1) Choke Feeding; and (2) Inching Discharge. With Choke Feeding,
the gates are held fully open until the scales are empty. Choke Feeding is used when
the truck or mixer can handle very fast discharge rates. With Inching Discharge, the
gates are pulsed open and closed to create a smooth flow of material from the scales.
Inching Discharge helps to avoid overflowing the truck or mixer.

Assuming there are no problems, initial water is fed, then the remaining materials are
discharged in the order established in the sequence set for this mix design. Several
discharge and system parameters control the discharge rate. Discharge continues
until there is a certain amount of material left in each scale. At this point, the gates
open fully and the vibrators come on to clear hung-up material. When each scale
reaches its zero point (Scale Empty value), its gate is held open for a set amount of
time, then closed. Remaining water is then fed. When all devices are empty, an end-
of-load signal is generated.

To avoid overflowing a truck, you can assign a percentage of the discharge rate to the
truck (on the TRUCKS screen). The discharge rate is then automatically reduced to
what the truck can handle.

02/09/10 173
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BASIC STEPS FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING

To simplify our discussion of automatic batching, we start with the basic steps for
running a batch. These are general guidelines only, provided solely as an overview to
understanding Spectrum batching; they do not include details. Details are given
when we discuss the screens used to enter orders and prepare and run batches.
Without further adieu, then, here are the basic steps for running a batch
automatically:

1. From the ORDER INDEX or LOAD INDEX screen, select the order you want to
batch. (Remember, the Order Index is used for orders entered locally on the
Spectrum while the Load Index screen is used for orders downloaded from a
Dispatch System.) Press [F1] to pull the order onto the BATCH SETUP screen.
2. Make any necessary adjustments to the order (this information is covered in
the section titled “Batch Setup Screen”).
3. Press [F9] – RUN to start the batch. The RUN prompt at the top of the screen
turns white to show that the batch has been started. The GRAPH screen
appears. This screen shows the progress of weigh-up (by ingredient at the top
of the screen, by scale at the bottom). (See “The Graph Screen” section for
details.) Also, the top portion of the ticket is normally printed at this time.

NOTE: If tolerance errors occur during weigh-up, a red error window pops
up. You can choose to accept the error by pressing [F4], retry
feeding by pressing [F6], or you can press the manual feed button
until enough material is fed then press [F6].

4. Once the materials have weighed up and a truck is in place, press [F11] –
DISCH to start discharge. The DISCH prompt at the top of the screen turns
white while discharge is occurring. You will see the colored bars at the
bottom of the screen move from right to left to show the scales discharging.
Normally, the remainder of the ticket (batch weights) are printed at this time.
5. When discharge is complete, both the RUN and DISCH prompts at the top of
the screen turn back to the normal black color. Press [F12] to return to the
BATCH SETUP screen.

NOTE: If the Batch on Receipt feature is enabled, a batch is automatically

run each time a ticket is received. The ticket can come from either
the Spectrum or a communications link (e.g., Link-2000). If
multiple tickets are received, the next batch freewheels (i.e., when
one device is empty, it weighs up material for the next batch).

02/09/10 174
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SCREENS USED FOR AUTOMATIC BATCHING

In this section, we will discuss the screens used for entering orders, and for preparing
and running batches. Our discussion will follow a logical workflow, starting with a
discussion of the ORDER INDEX and LOAD INDEX screens and ending with running
batches on the GRAPH screen.

ª ORDER INDEX AND LOAD INDEX SCREENS

These screens function the same in that they allow you to select an order and transfer
it to the BATCH SETUP screen, where you can prepare it for batching. They are
different in that the ORDER INDEX lists orders that were entered locally on the
Spectrum, while the LOAD INDEX screen lists orders downloaded from a Dispatch
System. Another difference is that on the ORDER INDEX, you can make some
changes to the orders on the index. You cannot make any changes to orders listed on
the LOAD INDEX.

An example of each screen is shown next. Each example is followed by a description

of its fields and functions keys.

Order Index

02/09/10 175
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELDS - ORDER INDEX

Information that appears on this screen is pulled from the Order Entry screen. Each
field on this screen, except for Mix Code and Delivered Amount, is editable.
Changes made to these fields also change the order record.

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Order Date Contains the date for which orders are being displayed.
Only one date can be displayed. Browse this field to select
a different date.
Order Code/Time Two-part field. The first part is the system-generated order
code. The second part is the time the first load of the order
is to arrive on the job.
Job Name Job name associated with the order. If a project is not
associated with the order, the name of the customer is
displayed in this field.
Order Status Browseable field of order statuses. Valid entries are:
• N – Normal (firm)
• C – Cancelled (cancels all totals)
• E – Ended (keeps delivered totals)
• H – Held
• W – Will Call
Truck Code Truck code assigned to the order. When this field contains a
truck code, the information is carried over to the BATCH
SETUP screen. This information can be changed at any
time.
Notes Any notes entered on the order.
Mix Code Mix code entered on the order. Cannot be changed here.
Ordered Amount Total yards ordered for the order. You may add a + after
the number to designate that a finish load is needed.
Delivered This number is updated by the system each time a load is
Amount batched for the order.
Firm + Will Call: System-generated total of Firm + Will Call yards ordered
for the order date. Orders with a status of N or H are
considered firm orders.
Firm Orders: System-generated total of yards delivered for the day.
Orders with a status of N or H are considered firm orders.

02/09/10 176
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FUNCTION KEYS - ORDER INDEX

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Batch Setup Takes you directly to the BATCH SETUP screen.
Information for the highlighted order is automatically
pulled onto this screen..
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Ticket Takes you directly to the QUICK TICKET screen for the
highlighted order.
[F4] - Today Returns you to the current day’s orders if you are viewing
orders for a past or future date.
[F5] - Resort Updates the Order Index with any new orders added via a
remote terminal.
[F6] - Orders Takes you directly to the ORDER ENTRY screen. If an
order is highlighted when you press this key, that order is
displayed on the ORDER ENTRY screen.
[F7] - Projects Takes your directly to the PROJECTS screen.
[F8] - Menu Takes your directly to the DATA ENTRY MENU.

02/09/10 177
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Load Index

• Information that appears on this screen comes from a Dispatch system (or
from a COMMANDbatch system).
• You cannot change any information on this screen, but you can change the
order of unbatched loads by moving them up or down the list. Press [CTRL
+ ↑] to move a load up. Press [CTRL + ↓] to move a load down the list.
• The asterisk (*) beside a mix code means that extra products were attached to
the ticket.
• Tickets are displayed in different colors, depending their load status. Press
[F5] from the Load Index to pull up a list explaining what each color means.

FIELDS - LOAD INDEX

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Time Time the order is to be batched.
Truck Truck assigned to the ticket. If the ticket was generated
from COMMANDbatch, the truck number will not
appear.
Mix Code Mix code to be batched for the ticket.
Load Size Load size to be batched.
Notes Special instructions attached to the ticket.
Ret’d Amount/Mix Amount and mix code of the returned mix, if any.
Design

02/09/10 178
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FUNCTION KEYS - LOAD INDEX

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[SHIFT + F5] If you are viewing orders for any day other than today,
pressing this key combination pulls up orders for today.
[SHIFT + F7] Press this key combination to view orders for previous
dates. Each time you press this key combination, you go
back one day.
[SHIFT + F8] Press this key combination to view orders for future
dates. Each time you press this key combination, you go
forward one day.
[F1] - Batch Setup Takes you directly to the BATCH SETUP screen.
Information for the highlighted order is automatically
pulled onto this screen.
[F3] - Batch Weights Pulls up the batch weights for the highlighted order. If
no batches have been run against the order, the
“Required” and “Batched” weights will contain zeros.
[F4] - Create Pulls up a Quick Load Create box so you can enter an
order without the Order Entry or Dispatch functions.
Only minimal information can be entered. The “quick
load” appears on the Load Index for batching. This is
used mostly with systems with Dispatch links. (See
“Quick Load” for more information.)
[F5] - Legend Pulls up a box explaining the meaning of colors used on
this screen.
[F6] - Edit Pulls up the selected order for editing. You cannot
change the Mix Code, however.
[F8] - Void Voids (cancels) the selected order. Works for either
batched or un-batched orders.

02/09/10 179
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª ORDER ENTRY SCREEN

If you do not receive orders from a Dispatch system, you must manually enter orders
on the ORDER ENTRY screen, which is accessed by selecting MAIN MENU­DATA
ENTRY­ORDERS.

Order Entry Screen

FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Date Date for which the order was placed. Defaults to the current
date.
Order Code System-generated field. Each day, order codes begin at 1
and then increase. The order code is not unique within the
system, only unique within a given day.
Customer Customer for which the order was placed.
Project Project, if any, from which the order was generated.
Mix Code Mix code ordered. Each order can have only one mix code.
Ordered Amount of the mix design that was ordered. You may add
a “+” after the number to designate that a finish load is
needed.
Slump Ordered slump of the mix design.
Load Size Load size for the order.
Notes Any notes entered from a project, customer, or manually by
the order entry person.

02/09/10 180
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Consistence For EN 206 users, this field contains the EN 206
Consistence Class (S1, S2, etc.) or Slump in millimeters.
This information defaults in from the mix design and onto
tickets for the order.
On Job Time Time that the first load is to arrive on the job. This field
adds travel and waiting times when posted on the ORDER
INDEX, even if the times are equal to zero.
Spacing Time Amount of time between loads requested by the customer.
May be entered from a project, or manually by the order
entry person.
Truck Type Browseable field of valid truck types from the truck
database. Use this field only to limit the type of truck that
can deliver the concrete.
Order Status Browseable field order statuses. Valid entries are:
• N – Normal (firm)
• C – Cancelled (cancels all totals)
• E – Ended (keeps delivered totals)
• H – Held
• W – Will Call
No. Of Loads Number of loads delivered for the order. This system-
generated field should not be changed.
Ext. Description For EN 206 users, this field can contain a string of
information about Strength Class, Exposure Class, Flow
Class, Maximum Aggregate Size, and Cement Type. For
non-EN 206 users, this field can be blank or used for
entering additional information. This information defaults
in from the mix design and onto tickets for the order.
Job Job name - filled in automatically if a project is associated
with the order.
Plant Plant from which the concrete will be shipped.
Addr Four address lines for delivery information. Filled in
automatically if a project is associated with the order.
P.O.# If a P.O.# is required, it is entered here. This field flashes if
a P.O.# is required (set in the Customer record).

02/09/10 181
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
UDF 1 User-defined field - may contain up to 20 characters. The
label is also user-defined.
UDF 2 User-defined field - may contain up to 20 characters. The
label is also user-defined.
UDF 3 User-defined field - may contain up to 20 characters. The
label is also user-defined.
Tax Zone Tax zone assigned to the customer in the customer file. You
may change this information.
C.O.D.? Indicates whether the order is a credit or cash order. This
can be pulled in from either the customer or project file.
Print Price? Indicates if pricing will print on tickets generated for this
order. This can be pulled in from either the customer or
project file.
Batch Code Y or B value. Y instructs the system to print batch weights
on tickets for this order. B instructs the system to refrain
from printing batch weights on tickets for this order.
Customer Customer name, contact name, contact and phone number
Name/Info are automatically inserted from the customer file.
Returned Mix Indicates whether concrete can be returned to the plant for
Allowed? this mix design.
Mix The mix design ordered by the customer is displayed in this
area. Resale products can also be entered in this area.
Ordered Total amount ordered for each product is entered in this
field.
Size Load size for this mix design. (For resale products, this is
the amount to be delivered with each load.)
Delivered As products are delivered, the system updates this field with
the total amount delivered.
Description Description of the product. Automatically entered but can
be changed if needed.

FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save Saves data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Times Pulls up a box so you can change Order Times (travel,
waiting, unloading, etc.).
[F4] - Pricing Displays pricing for each product on the order. You
cannot change pricing through this function.
[F5] - Discount Pulls up a window so you can make pricing and discount

02/09/10 182
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

changes to products on the order. You can also add or edit

Consistence and Extended Description information
(required for EN 206 users).
[F6] - Ticket Pulls up a list of tickets against this order. You can edit
these tickets, and you can pull up the batch weights for this
ticket.
[F7] - Clear Cancels changes before you have saved them.
[F8] - Cancel Shortcut key that enters C (for cancelled order) in the
Order Status field.

02/09/10 183
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TO ENTER AN ORDER

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ORDERS. The ORDER ENTRY screen

appears with the cursor in the Order Code field. The Order Code is
automatically assigned by the system. Press [ENTER] to move to the
Customer field.
NOTE: If you want to change the date of the order, say, to create an order
for tomorrow, press [SHIFT + TAB] from the Code field to move
to the Date field. Type the desired order date and press [ENTER].
2. Move to the Customer field. Either browse to select or type the customer
code and press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Project field.
3. (For non-Project related orders): Press [ENTER] to bypass the Project
field and move to the Mix Code field.
(For Project related orders): Browse the list of projects or type the Project
Code. Press [ENTER] to move to the Mix Code field.
4. Browse the list of mix designs. Select the appropriate one and press
[ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Ordered field.
5. Type in the quantity ordered. If a finish load will be needed, type a “+” next
to the quantity. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Slump field.
6. Using the table of field descriptions given on the previous page as a reference,
make changes to the remaining fields as necessary. If resale products are
included, add them in the Mix field.
7. Press [F1] to save the order.

TO EDIT AN ORDER

There is more than one way to edit an order. One way is from the ORDER ENTRY
screen. Another way is from the ORDER INDEX. Obviously, editing is limited on the
ORDER INDEX because less information is displayed. But this is a quick way to
change data such as order time, status, or amount. Changes such as travel and
waiting times must be made from the ORDER ENTRY screen. Editing from both of
these screens is discussed next.

Editing from the Order Index

You can change the following items directly from the ORDER INDEX. To do this,
type over the existing information. The message “Update occurred” appears at the
bottom-left of the screen.
• Order Time (time first load is to arrive at job site)
• Job Name
• Order Status

02/09/10 184
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

• Truck Code
• Notes
• Ordered Amount

NOTE: You cannot change the Mix Code or Delivered Amount.

Editing from the Order Entry Screen

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ORDERS (or press [F6] from the ORDER
INDEX). Either way, the ORDER ENTRY screen appears with the cursor on the
Order Code field. “NEW Order” should appear at the top left corner of the
screen, and the current date and day should appear on the next line.
2. To edit one of today’s orders, type or browse for the appropriate Order Code
and press [ENTER]. The Order Code appears on the screen along with other
information for the order.
To edit an order for a day other than today, move the cursor over the current
date and type or browse for the appropriate date. Press [ENTER]. The cursor
moves to the Order Code field. Type or browse for the appropriate Order
Code and press [ENTER]. The Order Code appears on the screen along with
other information for the order.
3. Move the cursor to the appropriate field and type the new information. (When
you start typing, the old information disappears.) Press [ENTER] to move to
the next field. (Press [ENTER] to move past fields until you get to the one
you want.)
4. When you are finished editing, press [F1] to save your changes.

To Change Order Times:

Default times (travel, waiting, unloading, washing out, and returning) are assigned to
each order. These times are used to calculate the batch time of the next load. These
times can also be printed on customer delivery tickets. To change order times:

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ORDERS.

2. Type or browse for the Order Code. Press [ENTER]. The Order Entry
screen appears.
3. Press [F3] – Times. The Order Times box appears as shown below.

02/09/10 185
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Order Times Box

4. To change a time, type over the existing time.

5. Press [ESC] to exit the Order Times box, then be sure to press [F1] to save
your changes to the order.

To Change Order Pricing:

For an order associated with a project, pricing is usually driven by the project. For an
order not associated with a project, you can change pricing as explained below.
Pricing can be changed while the order is being created or after the order is saved.

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ORDERS.

2. Type or browse for the Order Code. Press [ENTER]. The order appears on
the screen with the mix design and any resale products displayed at the
bottom.
3. Highlight the product that requires a pricing adjustment.
4. Press [F5] - Discount to pull up the Discount Pricing box (shown next).

Discount Pricing Box

5. To apply a Discount, type either the dollars-per-unit or the percentage

amount on the Discount is line and press [ENTER]. If you type a dollars-

02/09/10 186
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

per-unit amount, the system calculates the percentage for you. Similarly, if
you type a percentage, the system calculates the dollars-per-unit.
In the example above, we entered 5 percent. The remainder of the pricing was
automatically updated when we pressed [ENTER] or [TAB].
6. To change the List Price, type the desired list price over the existing list price
in the List Price field under the Unit Price column. Press [ENTER] or
[TAB]. The system calculates the remaining pricing information.
7. Press [ESC] to exit the Discount Pricing box.
8. Repeat Steps 3 – 7 for each product for which you wish to adjust pricing.
9. Before you exit the ORDER ENTRY screen, be sure to press [F1] to save your
changes!

To edit or change EN-206 information:

The Consistence and Ext. Desc. Fields on the Discount screen (accessed by pressing
[F5]) describe concrete production in terminology required by the EN 206 Standards.
This information defaults in from the project record. If no project is used, it comes
from the mix design record.

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ORDERS.

2. Type or browse for the Order Code. Press [ENTER]. The order appears on
the screen with the mix design and any resale products displayed at the
bottom.
3. Press [F5] - Discount. The Discount/Pricing window appears.
4. Edit the Consistence and Ext. Desc. fields as needed.
5. Press [F1] to save the record.

TO COPY AN ORDER

As a timesaver, you can copy an order from the current or a previous date and save it
for the current or a future date. For simplicity’s sake, we will show how to copy an
order from a previous date to use on the current date.

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­ORDER Entry. The cursor appears on

the Order Code field.
2. Press [SHIFT + TAB] to move to the previous (date) field. Press [F2] to pull
up the list of order dates. Select the appropriate date and press [ENTER].
3. The selected date is entered in the (date) field, and the cursor moves back to
the Order Code field.

02/09/10 187
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

4. Press [F2] to pull up the list of order codes. Select the appropriate Order
Code and press [ENTER]. The order to be copied appears on the screen.
5. Press [SHIFT + TAB] until the cursor is again on the first (date) field.
6. Enter today’s date and press [ENTER].
7. Enter a new Ordered amount and Load Size.
8. Press [F1] to save the new order. The order is saved with the next Order
Code for today and added to today’s ORDER INDEX.

02/09/10 188
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª CONCRETE CALCULATOR SCREEN

Use the Concrete Calculator as a quick way to determine cubic yards (or meters) of
concrete the customer needs. Enter the measurements the customer gives you on the
CONCRETE CALCULATOR screen then enter the results on the ORDER ENTRY screen.

You can access the Concrete Calculator screen one of two ways:
• By selecting MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­CONCRETE CALCULATOR,
meaning you have to press [ESC] until you get back to the Main Menu; or,
• By pressing [SHIFT + F8] from the ORDER ENTRY screen, selecting
“Concrete Calculator,” then pressing [ENTER].

The second method is recommended if you are already at the ORDER ENTRY screen.
In either case, the Concrete Calculator appears.

Concrete Calculator

Procedures for using the Concrete Calculator are given next.

02/09/10 189
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TO CALCULATE RECTANGULAR SHAPES

1. Access the Concrete Calculator as described on the previous page.

2. Enter measurements for the Length, Width, and Depth. Press [ENTER] after
each entry. After you press [ENTER] for the Depth, the system calculates the
Total. Write this amount on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the
ORDER ENTRY screen.
3. If you need to calculate other rectangular shapes for this order, press [F5]
after you have entered the Depth for the first shape. This inserts the Total into
the Sub Totals area (so all Sub Totals can later be added to obtain a Grand
Total).
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 above for each rectangular shape.
5. Write the Grand Total on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the
ORDER ENTRY screen.

TO CALCULATE CYLINDRICAL SHAPES

1. Access the Concrete Calculator as described on the previous page.

2. Press [F1] to pull up the Concrete Calculator for cylindrical shapes. (You can
also press this key to go back to the calculator for rectangular shapes.)
3. Enter measurements for the Diameter and Height. Press [ENTER] after each
entry. After you press [ENTER] for the Height, the system calculates the
Total. Write this amount on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the
ORDER ENTRY screen.
4. If you need to calculate other cylindrical shapes for this order, press [F5] after
you have entered the Height for the first shape. This inserts the Total into the
Sub Totals area (so all Sub Totals can later be added to obtain a Grand Total).
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above for each cylindrical shape.
6. Write the Grand Total on paper so you can enter it when you go back to the
ORDER ENTRY screen.

02/09/10 190
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª BATCH SETUP SCREEN

Loads are prepared for batching on the BATCH SETUP screen. On this screen, you can
change target weights for ingredients not locked by mix design or material. You can
adjust water volume (Slump, In Truck, and Trim fields). You can also adjust
moisture and the truck’s discharge rate.

Adjustments are only in effect as long as you do not exit the BATCH SETUP screen. If
you exit and re-enter this screen, you will have to re-enter any adjustments.

Most adjustments you make on this screen do not change system records. The
exceptions are changes to moisture, which update system moisture records.

IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you run batches from the BATCH
! SETUP screen only. You can start batches from other Spectrum
screens but you cannot see which order is currently active on the
BATCH SETUP screen.

Two examples of the BATCH SETUP screen are given next – one blank and the other
with an order transferred onto it. After that, we describe the fields and function keys
associated with this screen. After that, we discuss how to prepare batches with and
without an order. Then we talk about the adjustments you can make on this screen.

Batch Setup Screen (blank)

02/09/10 191
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Batch Setup Screen (with an Order)

FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Mix Code Mix code to be batched. If the BATCH SETUP screen was
accessed from either the ORDER or LOAD INDEX, the mix
code is filled in by the system and cannot be changed.
Otherwise, browse this field to select a mix or type in the
mix code.
Load Size Amount of concrete to be delivered in the truck. You can
edit this data if it was not sent from a Dispatch System.
Slump Slump value for mix. You can change this value. (See “To
Change Mix Slump:” for more information.)
Truck Code of the truck that will deliver the concrete. You can
select another truck. When a truck is assigned, the charge
rate for the truck appears in the % field. Also, the name of
the driver appears just to the right of the charge rate.
% The rate at which the truck will be loaded. The percentage
entered here means that the truck will be loaded at this
percentage of the plant’s discharge rate. Example: 50%
entered here means the truck will be loaded at half the
plant’s discharge rate. (See “Changing Discharge Rate”
later in this section for more information.)
In Truck Amount of water in the truck before the load is batched.
The target for water will be reduced by this amount. You
can change this data. Also used to increase water to add on
the job.

02/09/10 192
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Ret Qty Amount of concrete in the truck returned from the previous
load. When this value is greater than zero, the Returned
Mix field also appears on the screen. (See the description
for Returned Mix later in this table.) You can change this
amount.
Sequence Sequence code (feed sequencing) to be used. Defaults in
with the mix code but you can select another sequence code.
Mixer Time Appears only for sequences using a mixer. Amount of time
the mix must to stay in the mixer before it can be discharged
into a truck. Defaults to the mixer time set in MIX
DESIGNS. If no mixer time was set for the mix, defaults to
the mixer time set on the MIXERS screen.
Trim (/yd) Amount of water to trim per yard, negative or positive. You
can change this data. Also used to increase water to add on
the job.
Trim (/Load) Amount of water to trim per load, negative or positive. You
can change this data. Also used to increase water to add on
the job.
Batch Code You can select either a Y or B value. Y instructs the system
to print batch weights on tickets for this order. B instructs
the system to refrain from printing batch weights on tickets
for this order.
Simulate Status One of these three values:
B – Actual batch. A batch of concrete will be created and
inventory and delivered amounts will be affected by
this batch.
S – Simulated demo batch. Concrete will not be created but
inventory and delivered amounts will be affected.
T – Training batch. No concrete will be created and the
inventory and delivered amounts will not be affected.
You can change this information.
Return Mix Mix Code of the returned concrete. (This field appears only
if the Ret Qty value is greater than zero.) You can edit this
information. NOTE: If the mix code of the returned
concrete is incompatible with the mix to be batched, a
Warning box pops up. You can press [F4] to clear this box.
Age Number of minutes returned mix has been in the truck.
(This field is visible only if the Ret Qty value is greater
than zero.) You can edit this information.
Ingredient Read-only field. Lists each ingredient in the mix design.

02/09/10 193
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Amount Target amount (per cubic yd/m3) for each ingredient. You
can change this information. The amount under the Target
column is updated to accordingly. Also, a red “#” sign
appears beside the changed amount.
Target Read-only field. Total target amount for the load. Equals
the amount per cubic yd/m3 multiplied by the load size, plus
any calculations for moisture, water correction, etc.
Customer Customer for whom the load is being batched. You can
change this data, but whatever you enter will be printed on
the load ticket.
Job If the load is associated with a project, the job name is
displayed. If no job exists, the customer name is displayed.
You can change this data, but whatever you enter will be
printed on the load ticket.
Notes Notes entered against the order or project. You can change
this data, but it will be printed on the load ticket.
Consistence For EN 206 users, this field contains the EN 206
Consistence Class (S1, S2, etc.) or Slump in millimeters.
The line under this field contains the EN 206 Extended
Description for the mix.
Information in these fields defaults in with the mix or order
and defaults onto Tickets using the mix.
Quantity Read-only field. Quantity of resale products associated with
this batch.
Product Read-only field. Description of resale products associated
Description with this batch.

FUNCTION KEYS

Function Key Purpose

[F1] - Reprint Causes the last ticket generated to reprint. You will be
prompted to press [F1] again to confirm.
[F2] - Browse Pulls up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields
have these brackets [ ].
[F3] - Menu Takes you to a subset of the MAIN MENU, which lets
you go directly to the Material Overview screen, or to
other menus like Plant Setup and Data Entry.

02/09/10 194
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Function Key Purpose

[F4] - Convert Displays amounts in the alternate units of measure (US
or Metric). Does not change the units of measure set for
the system, however.
[F5] - Mixes Takes you to the MIX DESIGNS screen. Press [ESC] to
return to BATCH SETUP.
[F6] - Inventory Takes you to the ON HAND LEVELS BY PLANT screen.
Press [ESC] to return to BATCH SETUP.
[F7] - Clear Clears all information from the screen.
[F8] - Moisture Takes you to the MOISTURES screen where moisture
data can be viewed and modified. (See “Adjusting
Batch Information.”)
[F9] - RUN Causes the batch on this screen to start weighing up.
NOTE: Although this function can be accessed from
any screen in the Spectrum System , it is highly
recommended that you run batches from the BATCH
SETUP screen only. This way you can ensure you are
batching the correct order.
[F10] - HOLD Causes the batch that is currently running to hold, or
suspend. This function can be accessed from any screen
in the Spectrum System.
[F11] - DISCHARGE Causes the load currently weighing up to discharge.
This function can be accessed from any screen in the
Spectrum System.
[F12] - GRAPH Displays the GRAPH screen that shows the progress of
weigh-up and discharge. This function can be accessed
from any screen in the Spectrum System.

ADJUSTING BATCH INFORMATION

As you can tell from the field descriptions given earlier, most of the information on
the BATCH SETUP screen can be changed before a batch is run. Some of this
information is very critical to the strength and make-up of the concrete. For this
reason, further explanation is given in the next few sub-sections. We will first
discuss changing target weights, followed by changes that affect the water target
only, and ending with changing the discharge rate into a truck.

³ CHANGING TARGET WEIGHTS

You can change the “target amount” of an ingredient for the batch currently on the
BATCH SETUP screen. This is often done to change the amount of a chemical, e.g.,
calcium, in a mix design. This changes the target amount for one unit (1 cubic yard

02/09/10 195
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

or meter). As soon as you make this change, the target amount of this ingredient for
the load is also updated.

To change a target amount:

1. Press [ENTER] until the Amount field for the ingredient whose target
you wish to adjust is highlighted.
2. Type the desired target amount for one unit (1 cubic yard or meter).
3. Press [ENTER]. The target amount of the ingredient for the entire batch
is updated, as shown in the Target field. A red # appears directly to the
right of the Amount value to indicate that a manual change was made.

Note: If the Modify Flag field of the Ingredients screen is set to N for a
particular ingredient, the target for that ingredient cannot be modified on
the BATCH SETUP screen. The Amount values for ingredients “locked” in
this manner are highlighted in yellow.

³ ADJUSTMENTS TO WATER

Adjustments to the Slump, In Truck, and Trim fields all have an affect on the
amount of water in the mix design. These adjustments are discussed next.

To Change Mix Slump:

1. On the BATCH SETUP screen, press [TAB] until the Slump field is
highlighted.
2. Type the desired slump value and press [ENTER]. The Target value of
the water ingredient changes based on the value entered in the Slump
field. If you increased the slump value, the water target increases. If
you decreased the slump value, the water target decreases. A red #
appears directly to the right of the Slump field to indicate that this field
was manually changed.

Note: The amount of change in the water target depends on whether

standard slump calculations or slump tables are used.

To Change In Truck Water Volume:

1. On the BATCH SETUP screen, press [TAB] until the In Truck field is
highlighted.
2. Type the total number of gallons that the truck is carrying from the last
washout and press [ENTER]. The water target automatically decreases.

To Adjust Water Trim on a “Per Yard” Basis:

02/09/10 196
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

1. On the BATCH SETUP screen, press [TAB] until the Trim gl / yd field
is highlighted.
2. Type either a positive or a negative amount in this field. A positive
amount increases the water for each yard by the amount entered in this
field. A negative amount decreases the water in the same manner.
Example: If you enter a 1 in this field for a 10-yard load, the water target
is increased by 10 gallons.

To Adjust Water on a “Per Load” Basis:

1. On the BATCH SETUP screen, press [TAB] until the Trim gl / Load
field is highlighted.
2. Type either a positive or a negative amount in this field. A positive
amount increases the water for the load by the amount entered in this
field. A negative amount decreases the water in the same manner.
Example: If you enter a 5 in this field for a 10-yard load, the water target
increases by 5 gallons.

³ ADJUSTMENTS TO MOISTURE

1. On the BATCH SETUP screen, press [F8] – Moisture. The Moistures box
appears as shown next.

Moistures Box

2. Press [TAB] until the Moisture Percent field is highlighted for the
ingredient whose moisture percentage you wish to change.
3. Type the new moisture percentage and press [ENTER].

Notes:

02/09/10 197
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ƒ The water target will only be adjusted if the ingredient whose moisture
was adjusted is part of the mix design.
ƒ The Probe Active field indicates whether a moisture probe is being
used for the ingredient, or whether the initial probe reading is used. Y,
N, or S is displayed in this field:
o Y – means a probe is used.
o N – means a probe is not used.
o S – means the system uses the probe reading taken at the
beginning of the batch for the entire batch.

4. Press [F1] to save the data and exit the MOISTURES box. The water
target will be automatically adjusted based on the percentage you just
entered.

02/09/10 198
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

³ EDITING THE TRUCK CODE BEFORE DISCHARGE

Besides selecting the truck code in the Truck field of the Batch Setup screen, there
are three other ways you can change the truck code BEFORE a batch discharges.
These methods are listed here and discussed immediately after that.
• By pressing [ALT + A] to pull up the Assign Truck Code dialog before the
ticket starts to print. (By default, tickets are set to start printing at LOAD
START but this flag can be changed in the Ticket Script Name(s) field of the
Printer Setup screen.)
• By entering the -T argument in the Ticket Script Name(s) field of the Printer
Setup screen so the system will prompt you for a truck code only if the Truck
field of the Batch Setup screen is blank.
• By entering the -F argument in the Ticket Script Name(s) field of the Printer
Setup screen so the system will always prompt you for a truck code before it
prints the ticket.
Note: Once the load has discharged (and the ticket has printed), you will have to
go to the Edit Ticket screen to change the truck code and/or driver. You
cannot modify the truck discharge rate on this screen, however.

Alt + A

To use this method:

1. Press [ALT + A] from any screen to pull up the Assign Truck Code
dialog (shown next).

Assign Truck Code Box

Note: A maximum of three tickets can be active at one time, meaning no

more than three tickets can appear on the Assign Truck Code dialog.
2. Enter the truck code and driver, or edit the existing ones for the selected
ticket.
3. Make sure ‘Y’ is selected in the Verified column for the selected ticket.
4. Press [F1] to save the information.

02/09/10 199
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Note: If the ticket has already started to print before you have saved your
data, the new or revised truck information will not be printed on the
ticket. You would have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to edit the
truck information then reprint the ticket.

-T Option in the Ticket Script

Typically, this method is used if you don’t want to select a truck until the
mixer is ready to discharge into a truck. This way you can wait to see which
truck is ready for the load.
Note: If this method is used, the ticket will not print until the truck code is
verified.

To use this method:

1. Go to SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­PRINTER SETUP and select the

appropriate Node Number.

Printer Setup Screen (with –T argument)

2. Add the –T argument to the script in the Ticket Script Name(s) field as
shown in the example above.
3. Press [F1] to save your data.
4. Then, when you run a batch without entering a truck code, the system
will prompt you with the following message.

02/09/10 200
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Truck Code Message

Note: Exactly when this message appears depends on when tickets were set
up to print (in the Ticket Script Name(s) field of the Printer Setup
screen). By default, tickets start to print at LOAD START, meaning
this warning message would pop up as soon as you pressed [F9] to
start the batch.
5. Press [F4] to clear the message then press [ALT + A] to pull up the
Assign Truck Code box.
6. Arrow up or down to select the correct ticket. Press [F2] and select a
truck code. The driver name is pulled in when you select the truck code
(if a driver was assigned to the truck).
7. Enter a driver name or edit the one that appears.
8. Make sure ‘Y’ is selected in the Verified column for the selected ticket.
An example of the completed Assign Truck Code box is shown next.

Assign Truck Code Box (completed)

9. Press [F1] to save the information.

The ticket will then print (or finish printing) and will show the new or
revised truck information.

Caution! If you forget to verify the truck code, the ticket will not print.
You will have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to edit the truck
information before the ticket will print. (See “Editing the Truck
Code After Discharge” for more information.)

02/09/10 201
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

-F Option in the Ticket Script

This method can be used if you want the system to ALWAYS prompt you
for a truck code.
Note: If this method is used, the ticket will not print until the truck code is
verified.

To use this method:

1. Go to SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­PRINTER SETUP and select the
appropriate Node Number.
2. Add the –F argument to the script in the Ticket Script Name(s) field as
shown next.

Printer Setup Screen (with –F argument)

3. Press [F1] to save your data.

4. Then, the system will always prompt you with the following message
when you try to run a batch, even if you have already entered a truck
code on the Batch Setup screen.

Truck Code Message

02/09/10 202
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Note: Exactly when this message appears depends on when tickets were set
up to print (in the Ticket Script Name(s) field of the Printer Setup
screen). By default, tickets start to print at LOAD START, meaning
this warning message would pop up as soon as you pressed [F9] to
start the batch.
5. Press [F4] to clear the message then press [ALT + A] to pull up the
Assign Truck Code dialog.
6. Arrow up or down to select the correct ticket. Press [F2] and select a
truck code. The driver name is pulled in when you select the truck code
(if a driver was assigned to the truck).
7. Enter a driver name or edit the one that appears.
8. Make sure ‘Y’ is selected in the Verified column for the selected ticket.
An example of the completed Assign Truck Code box is shown next.

Assign Truck Code Box (completed)

9. Press [F1] to save the information.

The ticket will then print (or finish printing) and will show the new or
revised truck information.

Caution! If you forget to verify the truck code, the ticket will not print.
You will have to go to the Edit Ticket screen to edit the truck
information before the ticket will print. (See “Editing the Truck
Code After Discharge” for more information.)

³ EDITING THE TRUCK CODE AFTER DISCHARGE

Use this method to edit the truck code and print the ticket if you did not do so when
prompted to verify the truck code.
Note: You will only be prompted to verify the truck code if there is either a –T or –F
flag in the Ticket Script Name(s) field of the Printer Setup screen.

Caution! If you do not verify the truck code as prompted by the warning
message, the ticket will not print.

02/09/10 203
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

To edit/verify the truck code from the Edit Ticket screen:

1. Go to DATA ENTRY­EDIT TICKETS.

2. Press [F2] to pull up a list of ticket dates.
3. Arrow down to the appropriate date and press [ENTER]. The cursor
moves to the Ticket ID field.
4. Press [F2] to pull up the Tickets Browse window as shown next.

Ticket Browse Window

Tickets whose truck codes have not been verified are displayed with a ‘P’ just
to the right of the Time column. Also there is a ‘0’ in the Ticket Number
column for these tickets.
5. Arrow down to the appropriate ticket and press [ENTER]. The ticket
appears on the Edit Ticket screen as shown next.

02/09/10 204
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Ticket with No Truck

6. The cursor should be on the Truck field in the upper right-hand corner of
the screen. Press [F2] to pull up a list of trucks.
7. Arrow down to the appropriate truck code and press [ENTER]. The new
code appears in the Truck field and the cursor moves to the ‘P’ just to the
right of the Truck field.
8. Type ‘Y’ over the ‘P’ then press [F1] to save the changes. As soon as you
press [F1], the ticket prints.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 for other unprinted tickets.

02/09/10 205
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

³ ADJUSTING TRUCK CHARGE RATE

The truck charge rate is automatically entered in the % field of the BATCH SETUP
screen when a truck is assigned to the load. This rate shows the percentage of the
plant’s discharge rate that the truck can handle.

The system controls discharge into the truck as follows:

Each scale discharges at a rate that is the median point of the Maximum and
Minimum flow rates for that scale. For example, if the Aggregate scale’s maximum
flow rate is 300 lb/sec and its minimum flow rate is 100 lb/sec, the scale’s actual
discharge rate would be 200 lb/sec. A 100% truck charge rate on the BATCH SETUP
screen means the Aggregate scale would load the truck at the 200 lb/sec discharge
rate. A 50% truck charge rate means the Aggregate scale would load the truck at 100
lb/sec (half of the scale’s discharge rate).

To Adjust the Truck Charge Rate:

1. On the BATCH SETUP screen, press [TAB] until the % field is

highlighted. (This field is just to the right of the Truck field.)
2. Type the desired discharge rate percentage and press [ENTER].
3. Proceed with the batching process.
Note: Changes to the truck charge rate on the BATCH SETUP screen do not
change the charge rate for the truck in the TRUCKS database table.

02/09/10 206
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª THE GRAPH SCREEN

The GRAPH screen shows the progress of weigh up and discharge for the batch most
recently started. Across the top portion of the screen, a colored bar for each material
moves from left to right to indicate the progress of weigh up. Colored bars at the
bottom of the screen move from right to left to indicate the progress of discharge
from scales and extra devices.

Two examples of this screen are given next, one showing weigh-up, the other
showing discharge. After that, we describe the fields and function keys associated
with this screen.

Graph Screen (showing Weighup)

• The RUN function key prompt at the top of the screen appears in white when
you press [F9] to start the batch.
• For each ingredient, a colored bar moves from left to right in the top portion
of the screen to show the progress of feeding.
• An asterisk (*) appears next to a material name when that material is Fast
Feeding.
• A (t) appears next to a material name when that material is Time Feeding.
• A (j) appears next to a material name when that material is Jogging.
• If a scale (non-decumulative) goes over capacity, the entire system goes into
Hold so the operator can determine whether to stop feeding into the scale
before pressing [F10] to take the system off Hold and continue batching.
Also, OVER is displayed in red text in the scale’s Weight column.
• ***** is displayed in the scale’s Weight column if the scale’s load cell is bad.

02/09/10 207
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Graph Screen (showing Discharge)

• The RUN and DISCH function key prompts at the top of the screen appear in
white until discharge is complete.
• For each scale, a colored bar moves from right to left across the bottom part of
the screen to show the progress of discharge.
• An asterisk (*) appears next to a scale or bottle name when that device is
discharging.

02/09/10 208
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELDS – GRAPH SCREEN

Field Description
Mix Mix code of the order/load being batched.
Size Load size for the order/load being batched.
Sequence Sequence code to be used for feeding ingredients..
Truck Truck that will carry the order/load being batched.
Slump Slump value of the order/load being batched.
Batch Number of batches required to make the load (e.g., 1/1).
Loads Number of loads batched for the current day.
Batched Number of yards batched for the current day.
Material Code for each ingredient in the mix design.
Target Target, based on the load size, for each ingredient in the
mix design.
Current Amount fed for each ingredient. Increases as the
ingredient feeds. Also, for each ingredient, a colored bar
moves from left to right across the screen to show the
progress of feeding.
%Target Percentage of the target fed so far for each ingredient.
Increases as the ingredient feeds. This field is actually a
display area for 4 different fields. %Target is the default
field. Press [F8] to cause another field to be displayed.
(See the description for the [F8] function key for more
information.)
Scale Name of each scale or measurement device.
Weight Weight of the materials in each scale.
Bottle Name of each bottle assigned to a measurement device.

02/09/10 209
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FUNCTION KEYS – GRAPH SCREEN

Function Key Purpose
[F1] - F1AGG Press this key to hold the AGG scale. Press this key again
to release the scale. This is a user-defined field.
[F2] - F2CEM Press this key to hold the CEM scale. Press this key again
to release the scale. This is a user-defined field.
[F3] - F3WAT Press this key to hold the WAT measurement device.
Press this key again to release this device. This is a user-
defined field.
[F4] - F4ADX Press this key to hold the ADX measurement device.
Press this key again to release this device. This is a user-
defined field.
[F7] - Abort Press this key to abort the batch. You will be asked to
press this key again to confirm. Once a batch is aborted, it
cannot be restarted.
[F8] - Mode The %Target field is a display area for 4 different fields.
%Target is displayed by default. You can display 3 other
fields. Each time you press [F8], one of these fields is
displayed in place of the previous one. The other 3 fields
are:
• % To go Percentage of target yet to feed.
• To go Amount in lbs left to feed.
• %Moist Current moisture of ingredients with an
active moisture probe.
[F9] - RUN Causes the batch currently displayed on the BATCH SETUP
screen to start weighing up. NOTE: Although this
function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum
System, it is highly recommended that you run batches
from the BATCH SETUP screen only. This way you can
“see” that you are batching the correct order.
[F10] - HOLD Causes the batch currently running to hold, or suspend.
This function can be accessed from any screen in the
Spectrum System.

02/09/10 210
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Function Key Purpose

[F11] - Causes the load currently weighing up to discharge. This
DISCHARGE function can be accessed from any screen in the Spectrum
System. (See “Starting Discharge.”)
[F12] - GRAPH When pressed from any screen, this key displays the
GRAPH screen. Pressing this key from the GRAPH screen
takes you back to the previous screen. When a batch is
finished, you can quickly return to the BATCH SETUP
screen by pressing this key.

STARTING DISCHARGE

Discharge is initiated by pressing [F11] from any Spectrum screen. You can also
do this as soon as you have pressed [F9] to start a batch. This “arms” the system
to automatically start discharge as soon as all ingredients are weighed up. Here
are a few things to keep in mind.
• If you have to clear or accept any feeding errors, you will have to press
[F11] again to resume discharge.
• Direct-metered ingredients (admixes and water) start as soon as you press
[F11].
• Make sure a truck is in place (or the mixer is running and empty) before
you initiate discharge!

ABORTING BATCHES

Press [F7] twice to abort all loads currently queued up.

Press [SHIFT + F7] on any load other than the current load to abort that load as
well as subsequent loads.

02/09/10 211
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TICKET PRINTING

ª OVERVIEW

Normally, a load ticket is printed each time a batch is run. Typically, the top half of
the ticket (delivery address and product information) is printed as soon as the batch
starts weighing up. As soon as the batch starts discharging, batch weight information
and scale tares are printed.

The reason for this two-part print process is as follows. The top portion can be torn
off as soon as it is printed and given to the driver. This saves time because the batch
operator doesn’t have to wait for the entire ticket to be printed before he or she starts
the next batch. When the batch weight portion of the ticket is printed, it can be torn
off and set aside for record purposes.

A sample ticket is shown on the next page.

02/09/10 212
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª SAMPLE TICKET

BATCH DATA
MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED % VAR %ABSP %MOISTURE ACTUAL WATER
SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16852 -.31% 5.00% M 96.16 gl
57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17388 -.32% 0.25% M 5.20 gl
CEMENT I 450 lb 4500 lb 4488 -.27%
COLD 28.0 gl 178.3 gl 176.4 -1.07% 176.44 gl
AIR 3.50 oz 35.00 oz 36.38 3.94%
REDUCER 16.75 oz 167.50 oz 169.00 0.90%
SIMULATED NUM BATCHES: 1
LOAD TOTAL:40213 lb WATER/CEMENT: 0.517T DESIGN WATER: 280.0 gl
ACTUAL WATER: 277.8 gl TO ADD: 2.2 gl WATER IN TRUCK: 0.0 gl
SLUMP: 3.00 " ADJUST WATER: 0.0 gl /load TRIM WATER: 0.0 gl /yd
LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME:02:26 ----TARES------------------------------------
AGG SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 79 lb CEM SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 8 lb
WAT SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 14 lb

02/09/10 213
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª TOLERANCE ERROR SYMBOLS

Any or all of the symbols described below can appear on batch weight reports and on
load tickets. These symbols indicate the type of tolerance errors that occurred during
a batch. These symbols let the operator know if the material was out of tolerance,
over- or under-tolerance, and whether re-trying the scale read had any effect on the
tolerance error. The absence of these symbols means that no tolerance error
occurred.

Asterisk * Indicates that the material was either under- or over-tolerance on

the first scale reading, and that the operator pressed [F6] - Retry
from the error pop to re-read the scale. Also means that the new
scale reading was, for whatever reason, back in tolerance.
Plus + Indicates that the material went over tolerance, and that the
operator did not press [F6] - Retry from the error pop to re-read
the scale.
Minus – Indicates that the material went under tolerance, and that the
operator did not press [F6] - Retry from the error pop to re-read
the scale.
Greater Than > Indicates that the material went over tolerance, and that the
operator pressed [F6] - Retry at least once from the error pop, but
the value re-read from the scale was still out of tolerance.
Less Than < Indicates that the material went under tolerance, and that the
operator pressed [F6] - Retry at least once from the error pop, but
the value re-read from the scale was still out of tolerance.

02/09/10 214
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª EDITING TICKET DATA

From the Edit Ticket screen, you can edit everything to be printed on the ticket except
for batch weights. Procedures for editing tickets are given next.

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­EDIT TICKETS. A blank EDIT TICKET

screen appears with the cursor on the Date field.

Edit Ticket Screen

2. Make sure the Date field shows the correct date (defaults to the current date).
If it does not, press [SHIFT + TAB] until the cursor is on this field, type the
date or select it from the browse list, and press [ENTER]. The cursor moves
to the Ticket ID field.
3. Type or select the correct Ticket ID from the browse list. Press [ENTER].
Information for that Ticket ID appears on the screen, and the cursor moves to
the Truck field.
4. Edit fields as needed, pressing [ENTER] each time to move to the next field.
Some fields have no browse lists. For these fields, type the new information
over the old (as soon as you start typing the old information disappears).
ƒ To edit pricing, discount, and EN-206 information (Consistence and
Ext. Desc. fields), press [F5] to pull up the Discounts screen.
ƒ To edit Truck Code, see “Editing the Truck Code After Discharge”.
ƒ To make a local ticket a dispatch ticket, see “Making a Local Ticket a
Dispatch Ticket”.
5. When you are finished editing the ticket, press [F1] to save your changes.

02/09/10 215
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª MAKING A LOCAL TICKET A DISPATCH TICKET

You can turn a local ticket into a dispatch ticket if the dispatch link goes down.
When the link comes back up, batch results for the edited ticket will then be available
when the dispatch computer requests batch results.

To make a local ticket a dispatch ticket:

1. Select the date and Ticket ID on the Edit Tickets screen.
2. Press <Shift + F4>. The cursor moves to the Disp # field.
3. Enter a unique Dispatch Ticket Code.
4. Press <F1> to save your changes.

ª REPRINTING TICKETS

You can print a copy of an existing ticket. This does not affect inventory or delivered
amounts. Tickets may be reprinted from either the BATCH SETUP or the EDIT
TICKET screens. Use the BATCH SETUP to reprint the last ticket. Use the EDIT
TICKET screen to reprint older tickets.

TO REPRINT THE LAST TICKET

1. Select MAIN MENU­BATCH SETUP.

2. Press [F1]. The system prompts you to press [F1] to reprint the last ticket, or
[ESC] to continue what you were doing.
3. Press [F1] to reprint the last ticket.

TO REPRINT AN OLDER TICKET

1. Select MAIN MENU­DATA ENTRY­EDIT TICKETS. A blank Edit Ticket

screen appears with the cursor on the Date field.
2. Type or select from the browse list the desired date. Press [ENTER]. The
cursor moves to the Ticket ID field.
3. Type or select from the browse list the desired Ticket ID. Press [ENTER].
Ticket information for the selected ticket populates the screen.
4. Press [F6] to reprint the ticket.

ª TICKET REPORTS

Examples of ticket reports are provided in the “Reports” section of this guide.

02/09/10 216
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCH WEIGHTS
Batch weight items can be included or excluded from the batch weight information
saved to hard disk and printed on tickets and batch weight reports. This is
accomplished on the Batch Weight Options screen (accessed by pressing [F3] from
the System Maintenance¤Printer Setup screen). (See “Selecting Batch Weight Items
for Printing” for more information.)

The following table describes most of the items that can be printed on batch weight
reports and on tickets. (See “Reports” for an example of batch weight reports.)

ª COMMON ITEMS ON BATCH WEIGHT REPORTS

ITEM DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL Name of the ingredient as entered in the Spectrum database.
SOURCE The first 10 characters of the Ingredient description.
DESIGN(OD) Amount of material needed to batch 1 cubic yard/meter of
-or- the mix design.
DESIGN QTY DESIGN(OD) is printed for Oven Dry mixes.
DESIGN QTY is printed for SSD mixes.
Note: Moisture in SSD (Saturated Surface Dry) materials
ranges from 1 to 3% above Oven Dry.
SSD SSD Design weight.
ADJ.T Adjusted SSD Design weight (after moistures)
REQUIRED Amount of this material needed to batch this load. For
cement and flyash, this value is equal to DESIGN QTY *
LOAD SIZE. For aggregates and water, the DESIGN QTY
would be adjusted for moisture in the aggregate.
BATCHED Amount of this material actually batched.
VAR Amount the final target varies above or below the required
amount.
Equal to BATCHED – REQUIRED.
% VAR Percentage the batched amount varies above or below the
required amount. Can be a negative value.
Equal to (BATCHED – REQUIRED) / REQUIRED.

02/09/10 217
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ITEM DESCRIPTION
%ABSP Percentage of moisture above Oven Dry needed to achieve
SSD (Saturated Surface Dry) weight.
This value comes from the Absorption field of the
Ingredients screen and typically ranges from 1 to 3% above
Oven Dry.
Note: This column appears if either of the variance
columns (% or amount) is turned off and “Print Material
Moisture Percent?” is turned on.
%TOTMOIST Total moisture (absorbed plus free moisture) in the
aggregate material of the mix design.
ABS.WAT Absorbed moisture in the aggregate material as set by the
supplier.
TOT.WAT Total water in the batch. Sum of free water and absorbed
water.
%FREE WAT Percentage of moisture detected by the probe or manually
-or- entered.
%MOISTURE %FREE WAT is printed for Oven Dry mixes.
%MOISTURE is printed for SSD mixes.
This value can be followed by one of the following:
M – means the moisture value was manually entered on the
Moisture edit dialog (accessed from the Batch Setup
screen).
A – means the moisture value was obtained from the
automatic probe.
E – means the system had problems obtaining the correct
moisture value from the automatic probe.
FREE WATER Weight of free water in the aggregate ingredient for Oven
-or- Dry mixes. Volume of free water in the aggregate
ACTUAL WAT ingredient for SSD mixes.
FREE WATER is printed for Oven Dry mixes.
ACTUAL WAT is printed for SSD mixes.
ABS Calculated absorbed water in the mix per yd3 or m3.
FREE MST Calculated free water in the mix per yd3 or m3.
TICKET SCRIPT Ticket scripts to be used for the selected plant. This entry
NAME(S) overrides the “base” scripts for the company. For more
information, see the description for the Ticket Script
Name(s) field in the table titled “Fields – Printer Setup
Screen”.

02/09/10 218
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ITEM DESCRIPTION
System Messages:
SIMULATED Batch was run in simulator mode.
NON-SIMULATED An actual batch was run.
NUM BATCHES: Number of batches need to complete the load.
Auto HH:MM:SS The following scenarios determine when these fields are
Manual HH:MM:SS displayed.
If Manual Power is turned OFF during a batch:
Auto HH:MM:SS and Manual HH:MM:SS both show the
Load Start Time.
If Manual Power ON at batch start (and left ON):
Auto HH:MM:SS and Manual HH:MM:SS both show the
Load Start Time.
If Manual Power is turned ON during a batch:
Auto HH:MM:SS is not displayed.
Manual HH:MM:SS shows the time Manual Power was
turned on.
If Manual Power is OFF at batch start (and left OFF):
Auto HH:MM:SS and Manual HH:MM:SS are both not
displayed.
Note: If the Print Manual/Auto option is set to “Yes” on
the Batch Weight Options screen, the name and amount of
the manually fed material is printed with the batch weights.
LOAD TOTAL: Total load weight.
DESIGN W/C: Water/cement ratio of the amounts specified in the mix
design. Equals:
TOTAL WATER WGT / TOTAL CEMENT WGT
WATER/CEMENT: Water/cement ratio of the amounts actually batched.
Equals:
TOTAL WATER WGT / TOTAL CEMENT WGT
This ratio can be followed by one of the following codes:
T – means you can add water up to the TO ADD amount
without changing the stated water / cement ratio.
A – means you cannot add water. This code appears if the
TO ADD value is zero.
DESIGN WATER: Amount of water needed to batch this load.
Equals DESIGN QTY * LOAD SIZE.
ACTUAL WATER: Amount of water actually used to batch this load (minus the
TO ADD amount).

02/09/10 219
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ITEM DESCRIPTION
TO ADD: Amount of water that can be added in the mixer.
SLUMP: Slump maintained for this batch. If slump tables are not
used, this value defaults to the mix’s design slump.
WATER IN TRUCK: Amount of water already in the truck.
ADJUST WATER: Amount of water added or subtracted from this batch,
besides the trim amount.
TRIM WATER: Amount of water to be added as trim. This value is set in
the Trim field of the Batch Setup screen.
LOAD COMPLETED Time the batch was completely discharged into the truck (or
LOAD TIME: mixer).
----TARES--------------- Start Tare (ST) and End Tare (ET) for each scale used to
batch this load.

02/09/10 220
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª TOLERANCE ERROR SYMBOLS

Any or all of the symbols described below can appear on batch weight reports and on
load tickets. These symbols indicate the type of tolerance errors that occurred during
a batch. These symbols let the reader know if the material was out of tolerance, over-
or under-tolerance, and whether re-trying the scale read had any effect on the
tolerance error. The absence of these symbols means that no tolerance error
occurred.

Asterisk * Indicates that the material was either under- or over-tolerance on

the first scale reading, and that the operator pressed [F6] - Retry
from the error pop to re-read the scale. Also means that the new
scale reading was, for whatever reason, back in tolerance.
Plus + Indicates that the material went over tolerance, and that the
operator did not press [F6] - Retry from the error pop to re-read the
scale.
Minus – Indicates that the material went under tolerance, and that the
operator did not press [F6] - Retry from the error pop to re-read the
scale.
Greater Than > Indicates that the material went over tolerance, and that the
operator pressed [F6] - Retry at least once from the error pop, but
the value re-read from the scale was still out of tolerance.
Less Than < Indicates that the material went under tolerance, and that the
operator pressed [F6] - Retry at least once from the error pop, but
the value re-read from the scale was still out of tolerance.

02/09/10 221
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ADVANCED BATCHING FEATURES

ª MULTI-BATCHING

The Spectrum can run batches automatically back to back. This is called multi-
batching. There are two different ways to multi-batch, Continuous Run and
Freewheeling. Each of these methods is discussed in this section.

CONTINUOUS RUN

If you need to batch the same mix design over and over (used mostly for products
plants), you can use the Continuous Run feature.

³ TO SET UP CONTINUOUS RUN:

Set the Continuous Run? field of the Batching Defaults screen to Y. The
Continuous Discharge? field of this same screen should also be set to Y.

³ TO RUN CONTINUOUS BATCHES:

1. Start the load.

2. Press [SHIFT + F9]. The RUN prompt at the top of the GRAPH screen
appears as CRUN.
3. To initiate discharge, do one of the following:
• (For continuous discharge): press [SHIFT + F11]. The DISCH prompt at
the top of the screen changes to CDISC. Then press [F11] to arm
continuous discharge. (The CDISC prompt turns white.)
- or -
• (To discharge each batch individually): press [F11] any time during the
batch process.

NOTES: If error pops appear for any batch, you must press [F11] again to
reset discharge authorization.

³ TO STOP CONTINUOUS BATCHING:

Press [SHIFT + F9] while the last batch is weighing up.

02/09/10 222
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FREEWHEELING

Freewheeling is an optional mode that allows you to “queue” a batch while

another one is running. You can queue up to 3 batches, each with a different or
the same mix design. Simply put, freewheeling means that as soon as a device
(e.g. scale or bottle) is emptied, it starts weighing up the next, or queued, batch.

³ TO FREEWHEEL:

1. Select the first load from the ORDER INDEX or LOAD INDEX and send it to
the BATCH SETUP screen. Or, pull up a mix design on the BATCH SETUP
screen.
2. Make any necessary adjustments to the batch and press either [F9] or [ALT +
F9] to queue this load for the first time.
3. Do one of the following to queue a second load:
• Escape back to the ORDER INDEX or LOAD INDEX and send another order
to the BATCH SETUP screen. Make any necessary adjustments and press
[ALT + F9] to queue this load.
- or -
• Press [ALT + F9] from the GRAPH screen while the first load is weighing
up to queue up the same mix a second time.

(In either case, the RUN prompt at the top of the screen changes to RUN2.)

4. You can queue a third load by repeating step 3. (This time, the RUN prompt
changes to RUN3.)
5. To initiate discharge, press [F11] any time during the batch process.

NOTES: Î As scales and bottles weigh up for the 1st load, an asterisk (*)
appears just to the left of the device name on the GRAPH screen.
As these devices weigh up for the 2nd and 3rd loads, a period (.)
appears instead of the (*).
Î The load number of the 2nd queued load is displayed in a cyan
color at the top of the Graph screen. The 3rd load number is
displayed in dark blue.
Î If error pops appear for any batch, you must press [F11] again to
reset discharge authorization.

02/09/10 223
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª QUICK LOAD

The Quick Load feature lets you enter minimal load information without using the
ORDER ENTRY screen or waiting for the Dispatch link to send a new ticket. It is used
mostly with Dispatch links. The “quick load” appears on the LOAD INDEX screen as
soon as you save it.

When the quick load is batched, a ticket is generated but there is no customer or
delivery information. However, you can add a short note to the quick load to be
printed on the ticket.

TO CREATE LOAD INFORMATION USING QUICK LOAD

1. Select MAIN MENU­LOAD INDEX.

2. Press [F4] – Create. The screen shown next appears.

Quick Load Screen

3. The cursor is on the Load Time field. Type the desired load time or press
[ENTER] to accept the current time.
4. The cursor moves to the Truck Code field. Select the desired truck and press
[ENTER].
5. The cursor moves to the Mix Code field. Select the desired mix code for that
ticket and press [ENTER].
6. The cursor moves to the Load Size field. Type the load size and press
[ENTER].

02/09/10 224
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

7. The cursor moves to the Slump field. The default slump is displayed. Press
[ENTER] to accept this value or type the desired value and press [ENTER].
8. The cursor moves to the Notes field. Enter any notes that you want the batch
plant operator to see and press [ENTER].
9. The cursor moves to the Seq field. Press [ENTER] to accept the default or
select from the browse list the appropriate sequence code and press
[ENTER].
10. The cursor moves to the Ret’d Amt field. Enter the amount of returned
concrete currently on the truck and press [ENTER]. You may also just press
[ENTER] to accept the default of zero in this field.
11. The cursor moves to the Plant field. Press [ENTER] to accept the default or
select the desired plant and press [ENTER].
12. Press [F1] to save the load. The load is then displayed on the LOAD INDEX for
the selected plant. The load is displayed in red text until batched. Then it is
displayed in white.

TO EDIT QUICK LOAD INFORMATION:

1. On the LOAD INDEX screen, select the load you want to edit and press [F6].
NOTE: You cannot change the mix code or edit a load already batched.
2. Make the desired changes and press [F1] to save your changes.

TO BATCH A QUICK LOAD BATCH:

1. On the LOAD INDEX screen, select the load you want to batch and press [F1].
The BATCH SETUP screen appears.
2. Following the steps given in the “Basic Steps for Automatic Batching”
section, make any necessary adjustments and press [F9] to run the batch.

02/09/10 225
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª QUICK TICKET

The Quick Ticket function lets you print a ticket without batching a load of concrete.
This function is accessed from the ORDER INDEX screen and is normally used for
non-concrete orders. When entering a non-concrete order, the mix code should be
entered as something like NONE or PRODUCT to distinguish it from orders of
concrete.

To generate a Quick Ticket:

1. Enter a Mix Design with no materials. In the Mix Code field, enter
something that identifies this mix design as being used for non-concrete
orders. (Examples: ADD-ONS, NONE, PRODUCT.) Save this mix design.
2. Enter an order that contains the appropriate non-concrete product(s). Pull in
the mix design you entered in Step 1 above. Save this order. It will appear on
your ORDER INDEX.
3. Select MAIN MENU­ORDER INDEX and select the order to quick ticket.
4. Press [F3]. The screen shown next appears.

Quick Ticket Box

5. All information except for Truck Code is filled in by the system. Enter a
Truck Code (if applicable) and press [ENTER].
6. Press [F1] to print the ticket.

02/09/10 226
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª BIN SWAPPING

The MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen pulls information from the MATERIAL

ASSIGNMENTS and FEED DESTINATIONS screens so you can see, at a glance, all bin
mapping for your plant. This screen allows you to quickly change ingredients
assigned to devices (known as bin swapping). For example, you can select the same
ingredient to be fed from two different bins during fast feed. You can also turn
mapping on or off for an ingredient. This should “not” be done while a batch is in
progress!

Material Overview Screen

To swap ingredients for a bin/silo:

1. While a batch is “not” running, press [F3] from the BATCH SETUP screen,
select “Material Overview,” and press [ENTER]. (You can also select MAIN
MENU­PLANT SETUP­MATERIAL OVERVIEW.) In either case, the
MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen appears with the cursor on the first ingredient.
2. Arrow down to the appropriate ingredient and bin combination. Press [F2] to
pull up a Browse list of ingredients.
3. Arrow down (or up) to the ingredient you want and press [ENTER]. That
ingredient replaces the old one.
4. Press [F1] to save your changes.

Notes: • Your changes will take effect on the next batch if you make a
change or clear the Batch Setup screen.
• You can enable/disable feeding for an ingredient-bin by
selecting “N” in its Active field.

02/09/10 227
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª QUICK EDIT

On this screen, you can create and edit macros to be used in Custom Equations and
Sequences. For example, the CEMSTR macro in the example below can be used in a
sequence where 10 percent of the aggregate is to be fed before the cement starts. The
benefit of using a macro is that you can use it several places in custom equations and
sequences but only have to change its value in one place - on the Quick Edit screen.

Quick Edit Screen

FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Plant Name Browseable list of plants.
Code Name assigned to the macro. Cannot be the same name
as a global I/O or a step label in a sequence.
Value Amount or percentage associated with the macro.
Description Literal description of the macro.

FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Save To save data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse To pull up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F5] - Ins Ln Inserts a blank row above the current one.
[F6] - Del Ln Deletes the current row.
[F7] - Clear Clears all data from the screen. Be careful about using this
function!

02/09/10 228
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª MATERIAL OVERVIEW

Once you have set up your plant (bins, scales, destinations, etc.), you can control
material-bin assignments and feed/discharge parameters from one screen - the
MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen. You can use this screen to assign/reassign materials
to bins and bottles, and to activate/deactivate these devices. From this screen, you
can also change feed or discharge parameters. These topics are discussed later in this
section.

A description of the fields and function keys on the MATERIAL OVERVIEW screen is
given in the tables that follow the sample screen below.

Material Overview Screen

FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Ingredient Browseable list of ingredients.
From Bin, silo, or tank to which the ingredient is assigned.
Note: Ingredient-bin assignments can be changed by
pressing [F6] to pull up Material Assignments screen.
To Scale or bottle into which the “From” device discharges.
Note: Scale or measuring device assignments can be
changed by pressing [F5] to pull up the Feed
Destinations screen.
Active Yes/No toggle for activating/deactivating the device.

02/09/10 229
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Other Extra devices are listed here.
Note: You can change the Start Delay, Pulse Time, and
Clear Time for one of these devices by highlighting the
device and pressing [F3] – More to access the
appropriate screen.

FUNCTION KEYS

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[SHIFT + F4] To pull up the Quick Edit screen to change global feed
sequence parameters (i.e. % of aggregate to be fed before
starting cement).
[F1] - Save To save data you have entered or changed.
[F2] - Browse To pull up a list of possible entries. Browseable fields have
these brackets [ ].
[F3] - More To pull up a subset of the Bins or Scales screen, depending
on which field (From or To) is highlighted.
[F4] - Sequences To pull up the Sequences screen.
[F5] - FD To pull up the Feed Destinations screen.
[F6] - Assign To pull up the Material Assignments screen.
[F8] - Other Moves the cursor to the Other devices, and vice versa.

TO REASSIGN INGREDIENTS

1. Select MAIN MENU ­PLANT SETUP ­MATERIAL OVERVIEW.

2. Arrow down to the desired ingredient and press [F2] to pull up the list of
ingredients.
3. Select the new ingredient and press [ENTER]. The new ingredient appears in
place of the old one.
4. Press [F1] to save your changes.

02/09/10 230
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE A DEVICE

1. Select MAIN MENU ­PLANT SETUP ­MATERIAL OVERVIEW.

2. Arrow down to the row containing the desired device. Tab over to the Active
column.
3. Use the [SPACE BAR] to toggle the value to either Y (for activate), or N (for
deactivate).
4. Press [F1] to save your changes.

TO CHANGE FEED AND DISCHARGE PARAMETERS

1. Select MAIN MENU ­PLANT SETUP ­MATERIAL OVERVIEW.

2. Arrow down to the row containing the desired device.
3. (For changing feed parameters): Tab over to the From column.
(For changing discharge parameters): Tab over to the To column.
4. Press [F3] to pull a subset of the appropriate screen (Bins screen for feed
parameters, Scales screen for discharge parameters).
5. Make changes to the appropriate feed or discharge parameters. Press [F1] to
save your changes.
6. Press [ESC] to return to the Material Overview screen.

02/09/10 231
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª TRUCK WASHOUT

This feature lets you create a water-only mix design for washing out trucks. The
procedure below assumes that a washout (WO) sequence with “skip discharge
authorize” set has been created. It also assumes that items in the base sequence have
been added to the WO sequence to defeat their functionality. For example, the step
label “BEEPER” could be used to remove the “V DIS_AUTH” stop condition line so
that the washout load will automatically discharge without authorization.

1. Create a washout mix design that has inventory tracking disabled and that uses
the WO sequence.
2. Enter the mix code in the Washout Mix field of the System Defaults screen.
3. Initiate Truck Washout using one of the following methods:
• From any Spectrum screen press [ALT + T] to load the Batch Setup
screen with the washout mix design for one unit load of the washout mix.
Press [ALT + T] a second time to start the washout batch and display the
Graph screen. Discharge occurs automatically, so when washout is
complete you can escape out of the Graph and Batch Setup screens to
return to the screen you were on when you initiated washout.
• Another way to initiate truck washout is by pressing [SHIFT + F3] from
the Load Index, the Order Index, or Batch Setup screens. Pressing
[SHIFT + F3] a second time starts the washout load the same way as
described above. When truck washout is complete, you are returned to the
screen from which you initiated truck washout.
• A third way to initiate and start truck washout is to press [F3] from the
Batch Setup screen to pull up a menu. Select “Truck Washout” from the
menu and press [ENTER]. The washout mix is loaded onto the Batch
Setup screen. Press [F9] to start the washout load. When washout is
complete, escape back to the blank Batch Setup screen.

02/09/10 232
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MIXER OPERATION (FOR PLANTS WITH MIXERS)

OVERVIEW
Î TO MAKE EXPLANATION SIMPLER, THIS OVERVIEW ASSUMES
THE MIXER IS SET FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION.

To start the mixer motor, the operator presses and holds the START button until
the motor starter is engaged and “locked up” through its auxiliary contacts to
power provided by the normally closed STOP switch. The START switch lamp
comes on and stays on once the starter is engaged.

If an I/O has been assigned to the Running Input on the Mixers screen, Spectrum
checks to make sure the mixer is running. Spectrum also checks for the presence
of the Tilted (Opened) signal which indicates that the mixer is empty. (NOTE:
This assumes the operator has manually tilted and righted the mixer once). When
the mixer is empty and running, the name of the mixer (i.e. MIXER) appears at
the top of the Spectrum screen.

Spectrum can now load the mixer. As this happens, the name of the mixer at the
top of the screen is replaced by the LOADING status message. When loading is
complete, the LOADING message is replaced by the MIXING TIME message.
Remaining mix time is displayed just to the right of this status message.

Note: The system uses the Mixer Time as set in the mix design. If no mix time
was entered in the mix design, the system uses the Mixing Time value
from the Mixers screen.

When Mixing Time expires, and the necessary interlocks are met (shroud,
diverter, etc.), the MIXING TIME status message is replaced by OPENING then
OPENED then DISCHARGING. Assuming the mixer is set for Automatic
operation, discharge occurs as controlled by the Partial Open Time, Partial Open
Pause, Full Open Time, and Discharge Time.

Once Discharge Time expires, the status message changes to CLOSING as the
mixer moves from the fully open to the fully closed position. The mixer is now
ready for another batch.

Note: If the load size exceeds the mixer’s capacity, the mixer multi-batches the
load.

02/09/10 233
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MIXERS SCREEN
On this screen, you can enter parameters and the operating mode for mixers. Up
to three mixers can be configured.

Mixers Screen

ª FIELDS

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Code Browseable list of mixers.
Name Description of the mixer.
Capacity/Unit Maximum capacity for this mixer in this unit of measure
(e.g. 10.00 cubic yards).
Charge Rate Percentage of the system discharge rate that this mixer
can handle. This percentage can be higher than the
normal charging rate (say, 150%) because mixers can
accept material at a higher charge rate than trucks can.
Keyboard Hold Browseable list of function keys. The one selected can
be used on the Graph screen to hold this mixer.
Disable Mixer Modes Yes/No field enables/disables automatic mixer operation
While Not Batching? if a batch is not in progress.

02/09/10 234
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Mixer Mode Browseable list of modes of operation for the Open and
Open/Close Close functions of this mixer. There are two fields – one
for Open and one for Close. The choices for each are:
O – for offline
M – for Manual (operator presses and holds down on the
button)
T – for Triggered (operator presses and releases the
button)
A – for Automatic
Retrigger Required Yes/No field.
after Hold? Y – if the mixer is put on hold while tilting, you must
press the Tilt button after releasing the Hold button to
resume tilting.
N – if the mixer is put on hold while tilting, the mixer
will resume tilting once you release the Hold button.
Start Timer At Yes/No field.
Beginning of Load? Y – means the timer starts when the first bit of material
reaches the mixer.
N – means the timer starts after all material has been
loaded into the mixer.
Force Open During Used for a single-action gate. Works the same way as a
Discharge? scale by holding the gate open during discharge and then
releasing it.
Show Actual Mix Yes/No field. If you open the mixer before mix time
Time? expires, do you want that time printed on the ticket or the
original mix time?
Y – means print the actual mix time on the ticket.
N – means print the original mix time on the ticket.
Stop Mixer Time with Yes/No field.
Mixer Hold? Y – means the mixer timer stops counting when the
mixer is put into hold.
N – means the mixer timer keeps counting when the
mixer is put into hold.
Interface Device When an external moisture control device is attached as a
serial device, you can select it in this field.
Serial Temper Port When an external temper control device is attached as a
serial device, you can select it in this field.
Mixing Time Default length of time, in seconds, that the mixer mixes a
load. This time is used on the Batch Setup and Mix
Designs screens as the default mixer time.

02/09/10 235
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Percent of Mix Time in Used for a shrink mixer. This means you can designate a
the First Mixer certain percentage of the mix time to occur while the
material is in the first (barrel) mixer before the material
goes to the (tilt) mixer.
Partial Open Time Length of time, in seconds, required for the mixer to open
partially from the closed position.
Partial Open Pause Length of time, in seconds, the mixer remains partially
open. Because trucks cannot accept material as quickly
as the mixer can dump it, the mixer is only partially
opened when it starts to load the truck. Then, after some
of the material is in the truck, the mixer will open fully.
Full Open Time Maximum length of time, in seconds, the system waits
for the Open limit to be met before giving a warning
message. If this time is left at zero, no warning message
will be given.
Discharge Time Length of time, in seconds, that the mixer remains fully
open.
Close Time Maximum length of time, in seconds, the system waits
for the Closed limit to be met before giving a warning
message. If this time is left at zero, no warning message
will be given.
INPUTS
Open Limit Browseable list of I/O addresses for the limit switch that
indicates when the mixer is in the “tilted” position.
Close Limit Browseable list of I/O addresses for the limit switch that
indicates when the mixer is in the “righted” position.
Running Browseable list of I/O addresses for the switch that
signals when the mixer is running. If material is loaded
into a mixer that is not running, it may not be possible to
start the mixer due to the added weight of the material.
Hold Browseable list of I/O addresses for the HOLD button on
the manual station. Pressing the HOLD button stops the
automatic dumping of material from the mixer into the
truck.
OUTPUTS
Open Browseable list of I/O addresses for the “tilt” signal sent
from the system to the mixer.
Close Browseable list of I/O addresses for the “righted” signal
sent from the system to the mixer.
Mix Time Done Browseable list of I/O addresses for the signal sent from
the system to the mixer when mix time has expired.
TEMPER

02/09/10 236
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FIELD DESCRIPTION
Material Code Browseable list of names for materials to be tempered
(usu. Water).
Unit Read-only field that shows the unit of measure used for
the material to be tempered (usu. gl).
Complete Browseable list of I/O addresses for the input that signals
when temper is complete. You can select the same I/O
point as the Tilt Limit so that when the mixer is done
tilting, the temper stops.
Type Temper device type. C (counter), or S (scale).

02/09/10 237
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

REPORTS
The Spectrum allows you to generate reports pertaining to batch weights, inventory,
ingredients, mix designs, customers, orders, projects, resale products, tickets, trucks,
sequences, and manual material usage. Reports are printed at the node destination
selected for the Report printer on the PLANTS screen. A sample of each report is
provided in this section.

PRINTING REPORTS
1. Select MAIN MENU­REPORTS. The REPORTS MENU appears.
Reports Menu

2. Select the report or report category and press [ENTER].

• When you select an item having an asterisk (*) next to it and press
[ENTER], the report is generated and sent to the printer.
• When you select an item having a greater-than sign (>) next to it and press
[ENTER], a submenu appears.
• For some reports, all you have to do is select them from the submenu and
press [ENTER] to print them.
• For others, when you select them from the submenu and press [ENTER],
another screen appears so you can enter a date range and/or other
parameters (e.g. order status). You can then press [F1] to print the report.
• When you select an item with nothing next to it and press [ENTER],
another screen appears so you can select a date range and/or other
parameters. After you do this and press [F1], the report is printed.

02/09/10 238
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CANCELING PRINTING OF ALL REPORTS

If you decide to cancel the printing of all reports being generated, select MAIN
MENU­REPORTS MENU­CANCEL REPORT and press [ENTER]. A message
appears to inform you that all reports were cancelled and that information already
sent to the printer may still print.

NOTE: You cannot cancel the printing of individual reports.

DISPLAY BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT

Note: The sample report below does not contain all the items that can be printed.
For a more complete list, see “Common Items on Batch Weight Reports”.

1. Select Main Menu ­Reports ­Batch Weight Reports ­Display Batch

Weights. A selection screen appears with the cursor on the Load Date field and
today’s date already entered by default.
2. To view batch weights for dates other than today, enter the appropriate date in
MMDDYYYY format (the system supplies the slashes “/”) and press [ENTER].
Or, press [F2] to pull up a list of dates, highlight the appropriate date, and press
[ENTER].
3. Tab over to the Load ID field. Press [F2] to pull up a list of load ID’s for the
selected date.
4. Highlight the appropriate load ID from the list. As soon as you press [ENTER],
the Batch Weights Report appears for that load ID.
5. To view batch weights for other load ID’s for the selected date, press [PAGE UP]
or [PAGE DOWN].
6. Press [F1] to send the report for the selected load ID to the printer. An example is
shown below.

02/09/10 239
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

========== ==================== ====== ==================== =======================

Monday, September 25, 2000 13:44
*** BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT ***
for load 427
thru load 427
========== ==================== ====== ==================== =======================

CUSTOMER TICKET NO LOAD NO PLANT NAME

LINDSEY CONST 8898 8908 01
TRUCK USER LOGIN DRIVER TICKET NUM TICKET ID TIME DATE
ALKON 8898 336 13:41 09/25/2000
LOAD SIZE MIX CODE SEQ LOAD ID
10.00 yd 3500 W 427
MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED % VAR %ABSP %MOISTURE ACTUAL WAT
SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16852 -.31% 5.00% M 96.16 gl
57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17388 -.32% 0.25% M 5.20 gl
CEMENT I 450 lb 4500 lb 4488 -.27%
COLD 28.0 gl 178.3 gl 176.4 -1.07% 176.44 gl
AIR 3.50 oz 35.00 oz 36.38 3.94%
REDUCER 16.75 oz 167.50 oz 169.00 0.90%
SIMULATED NUM BATCHES: 1
LOAD TOTAL:40213 lb WATER/CEMENT: 0.517T DESIGN WATER: 280.0 gl
ACTUAL WATER: 277.8 gl TO ADD: 2.2 gl WATER IN TRUCK: 0.0 gl
SLUMP: 3.00 " ADJUST WATER: 0.0 gl /load TRIM WATER: 0.0 gl /yd
LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME:02:26 ----TARES-------------- ----------------------
AGG SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 79 lb CEM SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 8 lb
WAT SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 14 lb

NOTE: When oven dry mixes are used, the %MOISTURE and ACTUAL
WAT column labels will read %FREE WAT and FREE
WATER, respectively.

02/09/10 240
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT (BY DATE)

Note: The sample report below does not contain all the items that can be printed.
For a more complete list, see “Common Items on Batch Weight Reports”.

1. Select Main Menu ­Reports ­Batch Weight Reports ­Batch Weights by

Date. A selection screen appears with the cursor on the Start Date field. By
default, today’s date is already entered in this field, as well as in the End Date
field.
2. To view batch weights for dates other than today, enter the appropriate date (in
MMDDYYYY format – the system supplies the slashes “/”) and press [ENTER].
Or, press [F2] to pull up a list of dates, highlight the appropriate date, and press
[ENTER].
3. Tab down to the End Date field. Repeat the process given in Step 2.
4. Press [F1] to send the report to the printer. An example is shown below. Note
that only the results for one batch are shown – the report would normally consist
of many batch results.

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

Tuesday, September 26, 2000 13:28
*** BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT ***
for Tuesday, September 26, 2000
thru Tuesday, September 26, 2000
========== ==================== ========================== =======================

CUSTOMER TICKET NO LOAD NO PLANT NAME

BATCH SETUP 8899 8909 01
TRUCK USER LOGIN DRIVER TICKET NUM TICKET ID TIME DATE
779 ALKON RICHARD 8899 337 13:17 09/26/2000
LOAD SIZE MIX CODE SEQ LOAD ID
10.00 yd 3500 W 429
MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED % VAR %ABSP %MOISTURE ACTUAL WAT
SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16880 -.15% 5.00% M 96.32 gl
57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17414 -.17% 0.25% M 5.20 gl
CEMENT I 450 lb 4500 lb 4482 -.40%
COLD 28.0 gl 178.3 gl 176.4 -1.07% 176.36 gl
AIR 3.50 oz 35.00 oz 36.38 3.94%
REDUCER 16.75 oz 167.50 oz 169.00 0.90%
SIMULATED NUM BATCHES: 1
LOAD TOTAL:40261 lb WATER/CEMENT: 0.517T DESIGN WATER: 280.0 gl
ACTUAL WATER: 277.9 gl TO ADD: 2.1 gl WATER IN TRUCK: 0.0 gl
SLUMP: 3.00 " ADJUST WATER: 0.0 gl /load TRIM WATER: 0.0 gl /yd
LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME:02:27 ----TARES-------------- ----------------------
AGG SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 94 lb CEM SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 12 lb
WAT SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 14 lb

NOTE: When oven dry mixes are used, the %MOISTURE and ACTUAL
WAT column labels will read %FREE WAT and FREE
WATER, respectively.

02/09/10 241
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT (BY LOAD)

Note: The sample report below does not contain all the items that can be printed.
For a more complete list, see “Common Items on Batch Weight Reports”.

1. Select Main Menu ­Reports ­Batch Weight Reports ­Batch Weights by

Load. A selection screen appears with cursor on the Start Load field.
2. Enter the appropriate load ID and press [ENTER].
Or, press [F2] to pull up a list of load ID’s, highlight the appropriate ID, and press
[ENTER].
3. Tab down to the End Load field. Repeat the process given in Step 2.
4. Press [F1] to send the report to the printer. An example is shown below.

========== ==================== ====== ==================== =======================

Monday, September 25, 2000 13:44
*** BATCH WEIGHTS REPORT ***
for load 427
thru load 427
========== ==================== ====== ==================== =======================

CUSTOMER TICKET NO LOAD NO PLANT NAME

LINDSEY CONST 8898 8908 01
TRUCK USER LOGIN DRIVER TICKET NUM TICKET ID TIME DATE
ALKON 8898 336 13:41 09/25/2000
LOAD SIZE MIX CODE SEQ LOAD ID
10.00 yd 3500 W 427
MATERIAL DESIGN QTY REQUIRED BATCHED % VAR %ABSP %MOISTURE ACTUAL WAT
SAND 1610 lb 16905 lb 16852 -.31% 5.00% M 96.16 gl
57 STONE 1740 lb 17444 lb 17388 -.32% 0.25% M 5.20 gl
CEMENT I 450 lb 4500 lb 4488 -.27%
COLD 28.0 gl 178.3 gl 176.4 -1.07% 176.44 gl
AIR 3.50 oz 35.00 oz 36.38 3.94%
REDUCER 16.75 oz 167.50 oz 169.00 0.90%
SIMULATED NUM BATCHES: 1
LOAD TOTAL:40213 lb WATER/CEMENT: 0.517T DESIGN WATER: 280.0 gl
ACTUAL WATER: 277.8 gl TO ADD: 2.2 gl WATER IN TRUCK: 0.0 gl
SLUMP: 3.00 " ADJUST WATER: 0.0 gl /load TRIM WATER: 0.0 gl /yd
LOAD COMPLETED LOAD TIME:02:26 ----TARES-------------- ----------------------
AGG SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 79 lb CEM SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 8 lb
WAT SCALE B: 1 ST: 0 ET: 14 lb

NOTE: When oven dry mixes are used, the %MOISTURE and ACTUAL
WAT column labels will read %FREE WAT and FREE
WATER, respectively.

02/09/10 242
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INCOMING INVENTORY REPORT

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

Tuesday, April 18, 2000 10:58 PAGE 1
*** INCOMING INVENTORY REPORT ***
for Tuesday, April 18, 2000
thru Tuesday, April 18, 2000
========== ==================== ========================== =======================
Incoming Inventory for Material:DARACCEL
Date Time Plant Bin/Tank Amount Units Supplier Receipt Number
========== ==================== ========================== =======================
Apr. 18 10:57 01 ADMIX07 5000.00 oz ED'S ADMIXES 26

Subtotal Supplier ED'S ADMIX: 5000.00 oz

---------- -------------------- -------------------------- -----------------------

Total Amount for DARACCEL : 5000.00 oz

========== ==================== ========================== =======================
Incoming Inventory for Material:TYPE 3
Date Time Plant Bin/Tank Amount Units Supplier Receipt Number
========== ==================== ========================== =======================
Apr. 18 10:56 01 SILO03 100000.00 lb ED'S CEMENTS 25

Subtotal Supplier ED'S CEMEN: 100000.00 lb

---------- -------------------- -------------------------- -----------------------

Total Amount for TYPE 3 : 100000.00 lb

========== ==================== ========================== =======================
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 243
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MATERIAL USAGE BY MATERIAL

Select Time Period: 1 for Day, 2 for Week, 3 for Month, or 4 for Year.
Example below shows Today’s Totals.

===============================================================================
Friday, November 1, 2002 14:37 PAGE 1
*** USAGE BY MATERIAL REPORT ***
TODAY'S TOTALS
Run from plant: 01
Last Cleared Time/Date 06/26/2002 11:27
===============================================================================
INGREDIENT REQUIRED AUTO-BATCHED ERROR (%) ON HAND
1 A'S 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
1 CR GR 151525.88 lb 151044.81 lb -.32 9505017.00 lb
1 CR ST C 113710.73 lb 113453.53 lb -.23 3342546.50 lb
1 RD GR 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
2 CR GR 165938.86 lb 165177.44 lb -.46 589758.56 lb
BLEND C 298628.78 lb 297123.34 lb -.50 4265181.50 lb
GRAV-BLEND 431620.38 lb 429798.09 lb -.42 4890358.00 lb
SAND TCG 1002252.94 lb 998015.50 lb -.42 6545947.50 lb
CEMENT 8100.00 lb 8081.39 lb -.23 6585320.50 lb
FINE AGG L 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 2386523.00 lb
FLYASH 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
PORT ST M 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
PORT WOOD 311306.94 lb 309609.78 lb -.55 290390.31 lb
PORTWOOD L 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
TYPE 3 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
COLD 103567.38 gl 100652.62 gl -2.81 733899.25 gl
HOT 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb
100 XR 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz
220-N 5813.88 oz 5868.00 oz 0.93 22532.00 oz
DARACCEL 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz
DARACEM 55 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 5000.00 oz
MB-VR 1633.61 oz 1667.50 oz 2.07 28332.50 oz
MICRO AIR 2089.02 oz 2201.00 oz 5.36 7799.00 oz
POZZ 307.80 oz 309.00 oz 0.39 19691.00 oz
POZZUTEC 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 10000.00 oz
RHEOBUILD 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 22000.00 oz
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 244
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MATERIAL USAGE BY PLANT

Select Time Period: 1 for Day, 2 for Week, 3 for Month, or 4 for Year.
Example below shows Today’s Totals.

===========================================================================================================================
Friday, November 1, 2002 14:40
*** USAGE BY PLANT ***
TODAY'S TOTALS
PLANT: 01
Last Cleared Time/Date 06/26/2002 11:31
===========================================================================================================================
INGREDIENT LOCATION ON HAND REQUIRED AUTO-BATCHED ERROR (%) MANUAL TOTAL BATCHED MATERIAL USAGE COST
1 CR GR BIN02 9505019.00 lb 151525.84 lb 151044.81 lb -.32 0.00 lb 151044.81 lb 755.21
1 CR ST C BIN01 3342546.50 lb 113710.73 lb 113453.53 lb -.23 0.00 lb 113453.53 lb 678.40
2 CR GR BIN06 589758.56 lb 165938.86 lb 165177.44 lb -.46 0.00 lb 165177.44 lb 789.73
BLEND C BIN04 4265180.50 lb 298628.78 lb 297123.34 lb -.50 0.00 lb 297123.34 lb 1240.11
GRAV-BLEND BIN05 4882801.00 lb 439199.34 lb 437356.22 lb -.42 0.00 lb 437356.22 lb 2015.01
SAND TCG BIN03 6545946.50 lb 1002252.94 lb 998015.50 lb -.42 0.00 lb 998015.50 lb 2105.67
CEMENT SILO01 6585320.50 lb 8100.00 lb 8081.39 lb -.23 0.00 lb 8081.39 lb 898.10
PORT WOOD SILO02 288288.81 lb 313421.94 lb 311711.19 lb -.55 0.00 lb 311711.19 lb 1540.86
TYPE 3 SILO03 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00 0.00 lb 0.00 lb 0.00
COLD WATER01 733899.38 gl 103567.39 gl 100652.62 gl -2.81 0.00 gl 100652.62 gl 0.00
100 XR ADMIX04 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00
220-N ADMIX02 22487.00 oz 5856.19 oz 5913.00 oz 0.97 0.00 oz 5913.00 oz 298.56
DARACCEL ADMIX07 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00
DARACEM 55 ADMIX01 5000.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00
MB-VR ADMIX05 28332.50 oz 1633.61 oz 1667.50 oz 2.07 0.00 oz 1667.50 oz 185.49
MICRO AIR ADMIX06 7776.00 oz 2135.37 oz 2224.00 oz 4.15 0.00 oz 2224.00 oz 145.32
POZZ ADMIX03 19691.00 oz 307.80 oz 309.00 oz 0.39 0.00 oz 309.00 oz 67.35
POZZUTEC ADMIX08 10000.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00
RHEOBUILD ADMIX09 22000.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00 0.00 oz 0.00 oz 0.00
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 245
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MATERIAL USAGE BY BIN

Select Time Period: 1 for Day, 2 for Week, 3 for Month, or 4 for Year.
Example below shows Today’s Totals.

===============================================================================
Friday, November 1, 2002 14:51
*** USAGE BY BIN REPORT ***
TODAY'S TOTALS
PLANT: 01
Last Cleared Time/Date 06/26/2002 11:27
===============================================================================
CODE DEVICE UNITS REQUIRED MANUAL BATCHED ON HAND
BLEND C BIN04 lb 298628.8 0.0 297123.3 4265180.5
GRAV-BLEND BIN05 lb 439199.3 0.0 437356.2 4882801.0
1 CR GR BIN02 lb 151525.8 0.0 151044.8 9505019.0
1 CR ST C BIN01 lb 113710.7 0.0 113453.5 3342546.5
SAND TCG BIN03 lb 1002252.9 0.0 998015.5 6545946.5
RHEOBUILD ADMIX09 oz 0.0 0.0 0.0 22000.0
POZZUTEC ADMIX08 oz 0.0 0.0 0.0 10000.0
220-N ADMIX02 oz 5856.2 0.0 5913.0 22487.0
DARACCEL ADMIX07 oz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MICRO AIR ADMIX06 oz 2135.4 0.0 2224.0 7776.0
MB-VR ADMIX05 oz 1633.6 0.0 1667.5 28332.5
100 XR ADMIX04 oz 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
DARACEM 55 ADMIX01 oz 0.0 0.0 0.0 5000.0
POZZ ADMIX03 oz 307.8 0.0 309.0 19691.0
CEMENT SILO01 lb 8100.0 0.0 8081.4 6585320.5
COLD WATER01 gl 103567.4 0.0 100652.6 733899.4
2 CR GR BIN06 lb 165938.9 0.0 165177.4 589758.6
TYPE 3 SILO03 lb 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
PORT WOOD SILO02 lb 313421.9 0.0 311711.2 288288.8
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 246
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MIX INVENTORY
Select Time Period: 1 for Day, 2 for Week, 3 for Month, or 4 for Year.
Example below shows Today’s Totals.

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Tuesday, April 18, 2000 12:58 PAGE 1
*** MIX INVENTORY REPORT ***
TODAY'S TOTALS
PLANT: 01 BATCH UNITS: yd
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

**** ACTIVITY TODAY **** ****** TOTAL ACTIVITY ******

MIX CODE RETURNED BATCHED LOADS RETURNED BATCHED
LOADS
-------------- ----------- ----------- ------ ----------- ----------- ------

1600 yd 0.00 12.00 3 0.00 12.00 3

1900 yd 0.00 2.00 1 0.00 104.00 31
2000 yd 0.50 10.50 3 0.50 54.50 17

**** ACTIVITY TODAY **** ****** TOTAL ACTIVITY ******

RETURNED BATCHED LOADS RETURNED BATCHED LOADS
----------- ----------- ------ ----------- ----------- ------
GLOBAL TOTAL yd 0.50 24.50 7 0.50 255.50 158
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 247
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

RESALE PRODUCT INVENTORY

Select Time Period: 1 for Day, 2 for Week, 3 for Month, or 4 for Year.
Example below shows Today’s Totals.

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

March 23, 2000 12:13 PAGE 1
*** RESALE PRODUCT INVENTORY REPORT ***
TODAY'S TOTALS
PLANT: 01 USER: ALKON
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

-- SHIPPED TODAY -- --- TOTAL SHIPPED ---

PRODUCT ON-HAND QUANTITY QUANTITY
-------------- ------------ ------------ ------------

0532 524,288.4 0.0 0.0

505 84.5 0.0 0.0
510 308 0.0 0.0
512 125 0.0 0.0
516 156 0.0 0.0
519 0.0 0.0 0.0
553 oz 0.0 0.0 0.0
554 oz 6,000.0 0.0 0.0
555 bag 62.0 18.0 18.0
SANDRESALE lb * SAND TCG 0.0 0.0
(*) denotes that the on-hand amount for the product is tracked in the
ingredient displayed.

*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 248
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

AVERAGE MOISTURE REPORT

When you run the report from the Reports Menu, select a Date and Time Range. The
End of Day and End of Week processes automatically run the report for the current
day and week, respectively.

The example below shows totals for two days, 02/16/2004 through 02/18/2004.

02/09/10 249
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INGREDIENT LISTING

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:13 PAGE 1

*** INGREDIENT LISTING ***

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION COST ON-HAND TOTAL COST

---------- ----------- ----------- ------------ --------------- --------------

1 A'S 1 A'S 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00

1 CR GR 1 CR GR 0.00/lb 9,505,017 lb 0.00
1 CR ST C 1 CR ST C 0.00/lb 3,342,546 lb 0.00
1 RD GR 1 RD GR 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00
100 XR 100 XR 0.00/oz 0 oz 0.00
2 CR GR 2 CR GR 0.00/lb 589,759 lb 0.00
220-N 220-N 0.00/oz 22,532 oz 0.00
BLEND C BLEND C 0.00/lb 4,265,182 lb 0.00
CEMENT CEMENT 0.00/lb 6,585,320 lb 0.00
COLD COLD 0.00/gl 733,899 gl 0.00
DARACCEL DARACCEL 0.00/oz 0 oz 0.00
DARACEM 55 DARACEM 55 0.00/oz 5,000 oz 0.00
FINE AGG L FINE AGG L 0.00/lb 2,386,523 lb 0.00
FLYASH FLYASH 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00
GRAV -BLEND GRAV-BLEND 0.00/lb 4,890,358 lb 0.00
HOT HOT WATER 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00
MB- VR MB-VR 0.00/oz 28,332 oz 0.00
MICRO AIR MICRO AIR 0.00/oz 7,799 oz 0.00
PORT ST M PORT ST M 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00
PORT WOOD PORT WOOD 0.00/lb 290,390 lb 0.00
PORTWOOD L PORTWOOD L 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00
POZZ POZZ 0.00/oz 19,691 oz 0.00
POZZUTEC POZZUTEC 0.00/oz 10,000 oz 0.00
RHEOBUILD RHEOBUILD 0.00/oz 22,000 oz 0.00
SAND TCG SAND TCG 0.00/lb 6,545,948 lb 0.00
TYPE 3 TYPE 3 0.00/lb 0 lb 0.00

*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 250
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MIX DESIGN LISTING

Only the first few mix designs of many is shown below.

============================== =================== ==================== ======

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:13 PAGE 1

*** MIX DESIGNS ***

======================= ======= =================== ==================== ======

NAME: 1000 DESCRIPTION: NYSDOT CLASS A yd

INGREDIENT AMOUNT
---------- ---------------
BLEND C 1887.0000 lb
SAND TCG 1043.0000 lb
PORT WOOD 606.0000 lb
COLD 265.0000 gl
MB- VR 2.7500 /C
220-N 2.0000 /C
POZZ 0.0000 oz
100 XR 0.0000 oz
DARACCEL 0.0000 oz
POZZUTEC 0.0000 oz

NAME: 1000BG DESCRIPTION: 1:1 STATE GROUT yd

INGREDIENT AMOUNT
---------- ---------------
SAND TCG 1374.0000 lb
PORT WOOD 1215.0000 lb
COLD 275.0000 lb

NAME: 1010 DESCRIPTION: NYSDOT CLASS A yd

INGREDIENT AMOUNT
---------- ---------------
2 CR ST C 0.0000
SAND TCG 1035.0000 lb
1 CR ST C 749.0000 lb
PORT WOOD 515.0000 lb
FINE AGG L 91.0000 lb
COLD 270.0000 lb
220-N 2.0000 /C
MB- VR 1.8000 /C
POZZ 0.0000 oz

02/09/10 251
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MIX DESIGN SUMMARY

Only the first part of the report is shown.

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:14 PAGE 1

*** MIX DESIGN SUMMARY REPORT ***

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

MIX LIST SEQUENCE ALLOW MIX DESCRIPTION

CODE PRICE CODE MODIFY? CLASS
------------ --------- -------- ------- ----- -------------------------

1000 0.00 Y NYSDOT CLASS A

1000BG 0.00 N Y 1:1 STATE GROUT
1010 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS A
1050 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS MS
10G 0.00 N Y 10 BAG GROUT
1100 0.00 Y NYSDOT CLASS C
1111 0.00 Y NYSDOT CLASS C
1200 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS D
1212 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS D
1300 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS E
1300G 0.00 N Y 1:3 STATE GROUT
1313 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS E
1400 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS F
1600 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS H
1600G 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS H GRAVEL
1616 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS H
1700 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS J
1717 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS J
1800 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS I
1818 0.00 N Y NYSDOT CLASS I
1900 0.00 N Y 2500 PSI BACKING
1919 0.00 N Y 1:3:6 STATE CURB BACK
2000 0.00 N Y CITY SIDEWALK
2020 0.00 N Y CITY SIDEWALK WITH FLYASH
2020G 0.00 N Y 3600 PSI SIDEWALKS GRAVEL
2028 50.00 D Y 2000 PSI SLABS
2041 0.00 N Y 2000 PSI SIZE #7
2047 0.00 N Y 2000 PSI SLAB
2054 0.00 N Y 2000 PSI TYPE 3 NO AI
2100 0.00 N Y CITY BASE
2100G 0.00 N Y 3600 PSI CITY BASE
2121 0.00 N Y CITY BASE FLY ASH
2200 0.00 N Y CITY CURB
2222 0.00 N Y 3000 PSI #1&2 GR PECR2E
2500SWL 0.00 D Y 2500 PSI WALL/FOOTER
2500SWLF 0.00 N Y 2500 PSI WALL/FOOTER
2521 0.00 N Y 5 BAG PEA GRAVEL
2522 0.00 N Y 2500 PSI CR GR
2522NA 0.00 N Y 2500 PSI FLATWORK NO AIR
2523 0.00 N Y 2500 PSI CR GR
2524 0.00 N Y 2500 PSI CLASS 2 PIPE ENC
2525 0.00 N Y 5 BAG NO. 1 STONE

02/09/10 252
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CUSTOMER LISTING
Only part of the list is shown below.

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:14 PAGE 1

*** CUSTOMERS ***

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

CUSTOMER
CODE NAME AND ADDRESS MISC INFO
---------- ------------------ ---------------------- ------------------------
ALKON ALKON CORP. Account Status : STATUS
BILLING ADDRESS LINE NUMBER 1 Account Balance: 1304.77
BILLING ADDRESS LINE NUMBER 2 Discount Code : DISCOUNT
PO-BOX Tax Zone : TAX
DUBLIN OH 43017 COD? : Y
Contact: CONTACT NAME Print Prices? : Y
Phone: (CON)PHN-NUMB
Notes: NOTES FIELD
Account No: ACCOUNT NUMBER

---------- ------------------ ---------------------- ------------------------

Evans Evans Building Supply Account Status : OK
143 South High Street Account Balance: 5697.37
Discount Code :
Tax Zone : 5507
Ralston OH 43210 COD? : Y
Contact: Mr. John Evans Print Prices? : Y
Phone: (614)234-8585
Notes:
Account No: 39484020

---------- ------------------ ---------------------- ------------------------

LIN500 LINDSEY CONST Account Status :
Account Balance: 500.00
Discount Code :
Tax Zone :
COD? : N
Contact: Print Prices? : N
Phone: ( ) -
Notes:
Account No:

---------- ------------------ ---------------------- ------------------------

MUR140 MURDOCK HOMES Account Status :
Account Balance: 1500.00
Discount Code :
Tax Zone :
COD? : N
Contact: Print Prices? : N
Phone: ( ) -
Notes:
Account No:

02/09/10 253
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

CURRENT ORDERS
Enter the status or orders to be included in the report:

N Normal
C Cancelled
E Ended
H Held
W Will Call

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:15 PAGE 1
*** CURRENT ORDER REPORT ***
*** BY ORDER TYPE N ***
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================
CODE PLANT CUSTOMER OJ/LT PROJECT CODE ORDERED DELIVERED
---- ----- ---------- ----- ------------------ ------------- ------------

1 01 Evans 08:29 60.00 yd 27.00 yd

Evans Buil 08:09 1492 AMERICAN WAY
2500 PSI BACKING 1900

2 01 LIN500 09:29 60.00 yd 20.00 yd

LINDSEY CO 09:09 1492 AMERICAN WAY
CITY SIDEWALK 2000

3 01 MUR140 10:29 60.00 yd 30.00 yd

MURDOCK HO 10:09 1724 PLEASANT PL
2000 PSI SLABS 2028

----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------ -------------

TOTAL 77.00 yd
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------ -------------
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 254
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ALL ORDERS
(Tomorrow’s, Yesterday’s, Future, and Past Order reports are not shown because they
have the same layout as the All Orders report.)

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:16 PAGE 1
*** ORDER REPORT ***
for Tuesday, December 14, 1999
thru Saturday, July 1, 2000
========== ==================== ========================== =======================
CODE PLANT STATUS CUSTOMER OJ/LT PROJECT CODE ORDERED DELIVERED
---- ----- ---- ---------- ----- ------------------ ------------- ------------

1 01 NORM ALKON 03:39 11.75 6.00

ALKON CORP 03:19
3000 3/6 WRA 2051

1 01 NORM Evans 10:10 40.00 yd 0.00 yd

Evans Buil 09:50
2000 PSI SLABS 2028

2 01 END PUT225 10:11 8.00 yd 8.00 yd

PUTNAM CIT 09:51 RIGHT OFF STATE ST.
2500 PSI WALL/FOOTE 2500SWL

3 01 NORM PUT225 14:22 0.00 yd 0.00 yd

PUTNAM CIT 14:02 RIGHT OFF STATE ST.
2500 PSI WALL/FOOTE 2500SWL

4 01 NORM PUT225 14:34 8.00 yd 8.00 yd

PUTNAM CIT 14:14 RIGHT OFF STATE ST.
2500 PSI WALL/FOOTE 2500SWL

1 01 NORM Evans 15:06 18.00 yd 6.00 yd

Evans Buil 14:46
2500 PSI BACKING 1900

1 01 NORM Evans 08:29 60.00 yd 27.00 yd

Evans Buil 08:09 1492 AMERICAN WAY
2500 PSI BACKING 1900

2 01 NORM LIN500 09:29 60.00 yd 20.00 yd

LINDSEY CO 09:09 1492 AMERICAN WAY
CITY SIDEWALK 2000

3 01 NORM MUR140 10:29 60.00 yd 30.00 yd

MURDOCK HO 10:09 1724 PLEASANT PL
2000 PSI SLABS 2028

---------- -------------------- -------------------------- --------- -------------

TOTAL FOR ALL PLANTS Firm: 265.75 yd 105.00 yd
Will Call: 0.00 yd
---------- -------------------- -------------------------- --------- -------------
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 255
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SELECT ORDER DATES

March 23, 2000 has been selected for the following report.

========== ==================== ========================== =======================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:16 PAGE 1
*** ORDER REPORT ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
========== ==================== ========================== =======================
CODE PLANT STATUS CUSTOMER OJ/LT PROJECT CODE ORDERED DELIVERED
---- ----- ---- ---------- ----- ------------------ ------------- ------------

1 01 NORM Evans 08:29 60.00 yd 27.00 yd

Evans Buil 08:09 1492 AMERICAN WAY
2500 PSI BACKING 1900

2 01 NORM LIN500 09:29 60.00 yd 20.00 yd

LINDSEY CO 09:09 1492 AMERICAN WAY
CITY SIDEWALK 2000

3 01 NORM MUR140 10:29 60.00 yd 30.00 yd

MURDOCK HO 10:09 1724 PLEASANT PL
2000 PSI SLABS 2028

---------- -------------------- -------------------------- --------- -------------

TOTAL FOR ALL PLANTS Firm: 180.00 yd 77.00 yd
Will Call: 0.00 yd
---------- -------------------- -------------------------- --------- -------------
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 256
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

LOADS BY ORDER

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:16 PAGE 1
*** LOADS SUMMARIZED BY ORDER ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================
Customer: Evans Building Supply
--------

Order: 1 Job name:#10 FORENSIC PARK Time: 08:29 Spacing: 10

-----

TRUCK From
Load Plant Leave Travel Wait Pour Wash Travel Return
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- ----------------
9.00 yd 01 11:14 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ????? 00:00
100 9.00 yd 01 11:21 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ????? 00:00
100 9.00 yd 01 11:09 20.0 10.0 10.0 -28.2 -40.3 11:21
------------------------ --------
Delivered 27.0 yd Averages: 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ?????
Customer: LINDSEY CONST
--------

Order: 2 Job name:#10 FORENSIC PARK Time: 09:29 Spacing: 10

-----

TRUCK From
Load Plant Leave Travel Wait Pour Wash Travel Return
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- ----------------
779 10.00 yd 01 11:29 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ????? 00:00
779 10.00 yd 01 11:26 20.0 10.0 10.0 -37.2 -49.3 11:29
------------------------ --------
Delivered 20.0 yd Averages: 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ?????
Customer: MURDOCK HOMES
--------

Order: 3 Job name:MURDOCK CIRCLE Time: 10:29 Spacing: 10

-----

TRUCK From
Load Plant Leave Travel Wait Pour Wash Travel Return
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- ----------------
123 10.00 yd 01 11:54 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ????? 00:00
123 10.00 yd 01 11:54 20.0 10.0 10.0 -39.9 -50.4 11:54
123 10.00 yd 01 11:32 20.0 10.0 10.0 -18.2 -50.5 11:54
------------------------ --------
Delivered 30.0 yd Averages: 20.0 10.0 10.0 ????? ?????
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 257
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ORDERS BY PLANT

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:16 PAGE 1
*** ORDER SUMMARY BY PLANT ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
Times shown are average minutes in each status
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PLANT: 01 , Batch Unit: yd

---------------- -----------

Evans Building Supply

Order Units/ Wash Wash Trip

Number Deliver Hour YARDS Load Down Travel Wait Pour Out Travel Hours
--------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- -----------------
1 3 0.0 27.0 0.0 ????? 20.0 10.0 10.0 13.0 ????? ?????

LINDSEY CONST

Order Units/ Wash Wash Trip

Number Deliver Hour YARDS Load Down Travel Wait Pour Out Travel Hours
--------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- -----------------
2 2 0.0 20.0 0.0 ????? 20.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 ????? ?????

MURDOCK HOMES

Order Units/ Wash Wash Trip

Number Deliver Hour YARDS Load Down Travel Wait Pour Out Travel Hours
--------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- -----------------
3 3 0.0 30.0 0.0 ????? 20.0 10.0 10.0 17.8 ????? ?????
Averages for Plant 01
=============== ====== ==================== =================== =================
0.0 77.0 0.0 ????? 20.0 10.0 10.0 14.6 ????? ?????
=============== ====== ==================== =================== =================
Company Averages 0.0 77.0 0.0 ????? 20.0 10.0 10.0 14.6 ????? ?????
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 258
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

PROJECT LISTING

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:17 PAGE 1
*** PROJECTS ***
Date:Thursday , March 23, 2000

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PROJECT CODE: PROJECT CUSTOMER CODE: ALKON
NAME: PROJECT NAME>>>>>>>> NAME: ALKON CORP.
ADDRESS: ADDRESS> >>>>>> >>>>>>>>>>>>>> ACCOUNT: ACCOUNT NUMBER
END DATE: 04/13/1998 LAST DATE: 04/13/1998
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PRODUCT PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROJECTED DELIVERED

---------- ----------- -------------------- ------- ------------- -------------
TEST 1 <<<<<<<<<<<,,, ALKON TEST NUMBER 1>>>>> 100.00 15.00
TEST 2 <<<<<<<<<<, ALKON TEST NUMBER 2>>>>>>>> 100.00 15.00

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PROJECT CODE: SLINK1 CUSTOMER CODE: Slink
NAME: STATE JOB NAME: John H. Slink Building
ADDRESS: SAME AS CUSTOMER ACCOUNT: 3994292
END DATE: 09/27/1999 LAST DATE: 09/22/1999
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PRODUCT PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROJECTED DELIVERED

---------- ----------- -------------------- ------- ------------- -------------
1919 1:3:6 STATE CURB BACK 100.00 yd 0.00 yd

*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 259
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

PROJECTS BY CUSTOMER

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:17 PAGE 1
*** PROJECTS BY CUSTOMER ***
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

CUSTOMER CODE CUSTOMER NAME ACCOUNT NUMBER
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================
ALKON ALKON CORP. ACCOUNT NUMBER

PROJECT CODE PROJECT NAME PROJECT ADDRESS

------------ ---------- --------- ---------- --------------------
PROJECT PROJECT NAME>>>>>>>> ADDRESS>>> >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

PRODUCT PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROJECTED DELIVERED

---------- ------------ -------------------- ------- ------------- -------------

TEST 1 <<<<<<<<<<<,,, ALKON TEST NUMBER 1>>>>>> 100.00 15.00

TEST 2 <<<<<<<<<<, ALKON TEST NUMBER 2>>>>>>>>> 100.00 15.00

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

CUSTOMER CODE CUSTOMER NAME ACCOUNT NUMBER
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================
Slink John H. Slink Building 3994292

PROJECT CODE PROJECT NAME PROJECT ADDRESS

------------ ---------- --------- ---------- --------------------
SLINK1 STATE JOB SAME AS CUSTOMER

PRODUCT PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROJECTED DELIVERED

---------- ------------ -------------------- ------- ------------- -------------

1919 1:3:6 STATE CURB BACK 100.00 yd 0.00 yd

*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 260
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

EXPIRED PROJECTS

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:17 PAGE 1
*** PROJECTS BY END DATE ***
Date:Thursday , March 23, 2000

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PROJECT CODE PROJECT NAME PROJECT ADDRESS END DATE
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- -----------------
PROJECT PROJECT NAME>>>>>>>> ADDRESS>>> >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 04/13/1998
ALKON CORP. ACCOUNT NUMBER ALKON

SLINK1 STATE JOB SAME AS CUSTOMER 09/27/1999

John H. Slink Building 3994292 Slink

* * * END OF REPORT * * *

02/09/10 261
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

PROJECTS BY LAST USED DATE

Last used date of March 23, 2000 has been selected for the report below.

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:17 PAGE 1
*** PROJECTS BY LAST DATE USED ***
Date: Thursday, March 23, 2000

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PROJECT CODE PROJECT NAME PROJECT ADDRESS LAST DATE
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- -----------------
PROJECT PROJECT NAME>>>>>>>> ADDRESS>>> >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 04/13/1998
ALKON CORP. ACCOUNT NUMBER ALKON

SLINK1 STATE JOB SAME AS CUSTOMER 09/22/1999

John H. Slink Building 3994292 Slink

* * * END OF REPORT * * *

02/09/10 262
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

RESALE PRODUCTS LISTING

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:17 PAGE 1

*** RESALE ***

*** PRODUCTS LISTING ***

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION LIST PRICE ON-HAND

---------- ----------- ------------------------- ------------- ---------------

555 CALCIUM BAG 17.00/bag 62 bag

554 3% CALCIUM 0.00/oz 6,000 oz
553 2% CALCIUM 0.00/oz 0 oz
519 WASHOUT CHARGE 25.00/ 0
516 HEATED MATERIALS CHARGE 7.00/ ??????????
512 FIBER MESH 0.00/ ??????????
510 SUPER PLASTICIZER 0.00/ ??????????
505 OVERTIME CHARGE 60.00/ 84
0532 CONVEYOR CHARGE 0.00/ 524,288
SANDRESALE SAND SOLD SEPARATELY 0.25/lb * SAND TCG
(*) denotes that the on-hand amount for the product is tracked in the
ingredient displayed.

* * * END OF REPORT * * *

02/09/10 263
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

C.O.D. TICKETS
Non-C.O.D. and All Ticket reports are laid out the same way, so they are not shown.

======================= ==================== ====== ==================== =========

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:17 PAGE 1
*** C.O.D. TICKETS ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
======================= ==================== ====== ==================== =========
NUMBER DATE TRUCK JOB NAME
------ ----------- ---------- -------------
8816 03/23/2000 100 #10 FORENSIC

PRODUCT LOAD LOAD BATCH

CODE SIZE UNIT CHARGE
------- ------- --- --------
1900 9.00 yd 0.00
555 6.00 bag 102.00

Ticket Totals:
Discount Tax Ticket
Total Total Total
----------------------- -------
0.00 7.52 109.52

NUMBER DATE TRUCK JOB NAME

------ ----------- ---------- -------------
8817 03/23/2000 #10 FORENSIC

PRODUCT LOAD LOAD BATCH

CODE SIZE UNIT CHARGE
------- ------- --- --------
1900 9.00 yd 0.00
555 0.00 bag 0.00

Ticket Totals:
Discount Tax Ticket
Total Total Total
----------------------- -------
0.00 0.00 0.00

NUMBER DATE TRUCK JOB NAME

------ ----------- ---------- -------------
8818 03/23/2000 100 #10 FORENSIC

PRODUCT LOAD LOAD BATCH

CODE SIZE UNIT CHARGE
------- ------- --- --------
1900 9.00 yd 0.00
555 12.00 bag 204.00

Ticket Totals:
Discount Tax Ticket
Total Total Total
----------------------- -------
0.00 15.05 219.05

======================= ==================== ====== ==================== =========

Report Totals:
Discount Tax Ticket
Total Total Total
----------------------- -------
0.00 22.57 328.57
======================= ==================== ====== ==================== =========

*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 264
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

VOIDED TICKETS
No tickets were voided on March 23, 2000.

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:18 PAGE 1

*** VOIDED TICKETS REPORT ***

for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Ticket Sequence Customer Order Plant Load Load
Number Number Code Code Code Job Name Amount Units
-------- -------- --------- ---- ----- -------------------- --------- -----

----------------- ------ -------------------- ----------------- -------------

TOTAL VOIDED QUANTITY: 0.00 yd
----------------- ------ -------------------- ----------------- -------------

* * * END OF REPORT * * *

02/09/10 265
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TICKETS BY CUSTOMER
Only part of the report is shown.

=============================================================================
Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:18 Page 1
*** CUSTOMER/ORDER/TICKET LISTING ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
=============================================================================
=============================================================================

CUSTOMER NAME: Evans Building Supply CUSTOMER CODE: Evans

CUSTOMER ADDRESS:

=============================================================================

ORDER CODE: 1 P.O. NUM:

PROJECT CODE (BY ORDER):

TICKET DATE TRUCK PLANT MIX LOAD TAX TOTAL

NUMBER NAME CODE SIZE/UNIT CHARGE CHARGE
------ -------- ---------- --- ---------- ---------- ------ ------
8816 03/23/2000 100 01 1900 9.00 yd 7.52 109.52
8817 03/23/2000 01 1900 9.00 yd 0.00 0.00
8818 03/23/2000 100 01 1900 9.00 yd 15.05 219.05
------------------------------
ORDER TOTALS: 27.00 yd 22.57 328.57

----------------------------
CUSTOMER TOTALS: 27.00 yd 22.57 328.57
____________________________________________________________________________

=============================================================================

CUSTOMER NAME: LINDSEY CONST CUSTOMER CODE: LIN500

CUSTOMER ADDRESS:

=============================================================================

ORDER CODE: 2 P.O. NUM:

PROJECT CODE (BY ORDER):

TICKET DATE TRUCK PLANT MIX LOAD TAX TOTAL

NUMBER NAME CODE SIZE/UNIT CHARGE CHARGE
------ -------- ---------- --- ---------- ---------- ------ ------
8819 03/23/2000 779 01 2000 10.00 yd 0.00 0.00
8820 03/23/2000 779 01 2000 10.00 yd 0.00 0.00
------------------------------
ORDER TOTALS: 20.00 yd 0.00 0.00

----------------------------
CUSTOMER TOTALS: 20.00 yd 0.00 0.00
_____________________________________________________________________________

02/09/10 266
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MATERIAL COSTS
Only part of the report is shown.

================================================================================
Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:18 Page 1
*** CUSTOMER/ORDER/TICKET LISTING ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
=================================================================================
=================================================================================

CUSTOMER NAME: Evans Building Supply CUSTOMER CODE: Evans

CUSTOMER ADDRESS:

=================================================================================

ORDER CODE: 1 P.O. NUM:

PROJECT CODE (BY ORDER):

TICKET DATE TRUCK PLANT MIX LOAD TAX TOTAL MAT

NUMBER NAME CODE SIZE/UNIT CHARGE CHARGE COST
------ --------- ---------- --- ---------- ---------- ------- -------- --------
8816 03/23/2000 100 01 1900 9.00 yd 7.52 109.52 0.00
8817 03/23/2000 01 1900 9.00 yd 0.00 0.00 -.an
8818 03/23/2000 100 01 1900 9.00 yd 15.05 219.05 -.an
----------------------------------------
ORDER TOTALS: 27.00 yd 22.57 328.57 -.an

----------------------------------------
CUSTOMER TOTALS: 27.00 yd 22.57 328.57 -.an

=================================================================================

CUSTOMER NAME: LINDSEY CONST CUSTOMER CODE: LIN500

CUSTOMER ADDRESS:

=================================================================================

ORDER CODE: 2 P.O. NUM:

PROJECT CODE (BY ORDER):

TICKET DATE TRUCK PLANT MIX LOAD TAX TOTAL MAT

NUMBER NAME CODE SIZE/UNIT CHARGE CHARGE COST
------ --------- ---------- --- ---------- ---------- ------- -------- --------
8819 03/23/2000 779 01 2000 10.00 yd 0.00 0.00 -.an
8820 03/23/2000 779 01 2000 10.00 yd 0.00 0.00 -.an
----------------------------------------
ORDER TOTALS: 20.00 yd 0.00 0.00 -.an

----------------------------------------
CUSTOMER TOTALS: 20.00 yd 0.00 0.00 -.an

02/09/10 267
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FLEET UTILIZATION

=============================================================================================================================
Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:19 PAGE 1
*** FLEET UTILIZATION REPORT ***
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
=============================================================================================================================

Plant 01
Truck License Active Units Total Wash Wash %
Number Hours Per Hour Trips Units Load Down Travel Wait Pour Out Travel Capacity
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100 NONE 0.20 45.83 1 9.00 | 0.9 0.0 20.0 10.0 10.0 12.1 0.0 | 100.00
123 0.36 27.59 1 10.00 | 20.8 0.0 20.0 10.0 10.0 32.3 0.0 | 83.33
779 0.05 210.53 1 10.00 | 1.5 0.0 20.0 10.0 10.0 12.1 0.0 | 90.91
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Plant 01 Totals: 47.82 3 29.00 23.1 0.0 60.0 30.0 30.0 56.5 0.0 | 90.62
Average Minutes Per Delivery.......................... 7.7 0.0 20.0 10.0 10.0 18.8 0.0
Percent of Times Spent................................ 63.54 0.00 164.91 82.46 82.46 155.25 0.00
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Company Totals: 47.82 3 29.00 23.1 0.0 60.0 30.0 30.0 56.5 0.0 | 90.62
Average Minutes Per Delivery.......................... 7.7 0.0 20.0 10.0 10.0 18.8 0.0
Percent of Times Spent................................ 63.54 0.00 164.91 82.46 82.46 155.25 0.00
Productivity Summary.................................. 47.82 yards per driver hour 1.3 minutes per yard
*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 268
 Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

TRUCK PRODUCTION REPORT

=============================================================================================================================
Tuesday, August 28, 2001 07:19 PAGE 1
*** TRUCK PRODUCTION REPORT ***
FROM: 08/27/2001 07:18
TO: 08/28/2001 07:18
=============================================================================================================================
TRUCK DRIVER LOAD LOAD CUSTOMER PROJECT ORDER TICKET ADDRESS MIX LOAD
DATE TIME CODE NUMBER CODE SIZE
________ __________ __________ ________ __________ __________ _______ ________ ____________________ __________ __________
100 Smith 08/27/2001 15:55 MUR140 1 0017 2054 9.00 yd
Total: 9.00 yd

110 Johnson 08/27/2001 16:35 LIN500 2 0018 2054 8.00 yd

Total: 8.00 yd

123 Jones 08/27/2001 17:00 EVANS 3 0019 2054 8.00 yd

Total: 8.00 yd

*** END OF REPORT ***

02/09/10 269
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

MANUAL MATERIAL MONITOR

This report shows any events where material was manually batched.

================= ====== ==================== =================== =================

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:19 PAGE 1
*** Manual Material Monitor Report ***
Plant:
for Thursday, March 23, 2000
thru Thursday, March 23, 2000
================= ====== ==================== =================== =================
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- -----------------
Date: 03/23/2000

Load
Plant Type Time ID Ingredient Bin/Tank Amount Units
----------------- ------ -------------------- ------------------- --------------
System Restart 10:25 0.00

* denotes Manual Feed where amount could not be accurately determined.

* * * END OF REPORT * * *

02/09/10 270
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

SEQUENCE LISTING
Only the first few steps of the first sequence is shown.

========== ==================== =================== ==================== =========

Thursday, March 23, 2000 12:20 PAGE 1
*** SEQUENCES REPORT ***

========== ==================== =================== ==================== =========

========== ==================== =================== ==================== =========

PLANT CODE: 01
========== ==================== =================== ==================== =========
========== ==================== =================== ==================== =========
SEQUENCE CODE: D
========== ==================== =================== ==================== =========

STEP SOURCE DESTINATION

---------- ---------- -----------
AGG SCALE AGG SCALE TRUCK
QUANTITY:100%
START:F~ WAT SCALE~*[-HLDBCK_%]^V~ DVT AT DRY
START DELAY: 0.00 seconds MULTI-BATCH? Y TRACEPOINTS ON? N TYPE: F
CHARGE RATE:100 USE TRUCK CHARGE RATE? N SKIP DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION? N
STOP:
COMMENT:
Start agg scale when intial water has fed and Divertor at Dry

STEP SOURCE DESTINATION

---------- ---------- -----------
BOTTLE01 BOTTLE01 TRUCK
QUANTITY:100%
START:V~ DVT AT DRY
START DELAY: 0.00 seconds MULTI-BATCH? Y TRACEPOINTS ON? N TYPE: F
CHARGE RATE: 0 USE TRUCK CHARGE RATE? SKIP DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION? N
STOP:
COMMENT:
Divertor is at Dry

STEP SOURCE DESTINATION

---------- ---------- -----------
BOTTLE02 BOTTLE02 TRUCK
QUANTITY:100%
START:V~ DVT AT DRY
START DELAY: 0.00 seconds MULTI-BATCH? Y TRACEPOINTS ON? N TYPE: F
CHARGE RATE: 0 USE TRUCK CHARGE RATE? SKIP DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION? N
STOP:
COMMENT:
Divertor is at Dry

02/09/10 271
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

END OF DAY PROCEDURES

The End of Day process provides a way for you to run daily, weekly, monthly, or
yearly reports and back up the database all at the same time. Once the processes are
set up, simply press [F1] - Start from The End of Day Procedure Screen to run them.

CATEGORIES
There are four separate End of Day categories: Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and Yearly.
Each category lists Reports and Procedures you can select to run or not run. You
cannot add reports or procedures; you can only choose which ones to run or not run.

SELECTING WHAT TO RUN

To select which procedures and reports to run for a category:

1. Select MAIN MENU ­END OF DAY. A screen similar to the one shown next
appears.

End of Day Procedure Screen

2. Press [F6] – Setup. A selection box showing the following categories

appears:
• End of Day Setup
• End of Week Setup
• End of Month Setup
• End of Year Setup

02/09/10 272
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

3. Select a category and press [ENTER]. The appropriate setup screen appears.
In the following example, we selected “End of Day.”

End of Day Setup Screen

4. On the top half of the screen, enter the number of copies to print for each
report. (Leave a zero for each report you do not want printed.)
5. On the bottom half of the screen, enter a Y for each procedure you want to
run.
6. Press [F1] to save your entries.
7. Press [ESC] to return to the Setup selection box if you need to select another
category to set up.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each remaining category (End of Week, End of
Month, and End of Year).

IMPORTANT NOTES:
• “Clear and Reset . . . Inventory” should be set to Y so inventory totals are
always reset.
• If you purchased the Winlink product, refer to the User’s Manual for file
export information.
• For End of Day and End of Week setups, you can enter Y for either “Backup
Data to Floppy” or “Backup Data to USB,” not both.
• End of Month Inventory Report Flag. You can select the current working
month in the Set the Current Working Month for Automatic EOM
Operation field of the End of Month Setup screen so the system will
automatically remind you if you haven’t run an End of Month Inventory
report. If the report needs to be run, the End of Month screen automatically

02/09/10 273
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

appears when you restart the Spectrum (assuming you properly shut down the
system the night before).

RUNNING “END OF” PROCESSES

All “End of” processes are controlled from the End of Day Procedure screen. The
general procedure for running “End of” processes is:

1. Select MAIN MENU ­END OF DAY. The following screen appears.

End of Day Procedure Screen

2. On the top half of the screen, type a Y next to the “End of” procedures you
want to run.
3. Also on the top half of the screen, type a Y under the Floppy Disk or USB
column (not both) for Backup Batch Weights and Database Files Backup.
(You can only back up Custom directory files to floppy disk.)
Note: For Backup Batch Weights, you can enter a P so that batch
weights will be purged when the End of Day process is run
(even if batch weights have not been backed up).

4. Press [F1] – Start to initiate the selected procedure(s). Once the “End of”
process is finished, the system automatically performs the proper shutdown
procedure. It then informs you that shutdown has been completed. You may
then power off the Spectrum.
Note: If batch weights are older than the number of days specified on
the SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen, a message to this effect is
displayed on the bottom half of the End of Day Procedure
screen. If you do not back up batch weights 10 days after this
default deadline, the system automatically backs them up.

02/09/10 274
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FUNCTION KEYS – THE END OF DAY PROCEDURE SCREEN

FUNCTION KEY PURPOSE

[F1] - Start Initiates the End Of process.
[F3] - Reports Takes you directly to the REPORTS MENU.
[F4] - Utilities Takes you directly to the DISK UTILITIES MENU.
[F5] - Format Allows you to format a floppy disk. NOTE: Before you
format a disk, please see “Format Disks”.
[F6] - Setup Lets you select a category (End of Day, End of Week, End
of Month, or End of Year) to set up.

02/09/10 275
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

EXPORTING BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER

This utility lets you transfer batch weight information to Command Alkon’s QC
Helper, to a Microsoft Windows quality control program, or to a QNX disk.

Export Batch Weights Screen

ª TO EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­EXPORT

BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER.
2. The Drive field is selected with A as the default entry. Possible entries (from
the browse list) are:
A First DOS Floppy
B Second DOS Floppy
C First DOS Hard Disk
D Second DOS Hard Disk
Q QNX Directory
W Winlink Directory
E USB Removable Device
Select the appropriate drive and press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the
Start Date field.
3. Select the Start Date. The default is today’s date. You can browse for dates
with batch weights. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the End Date
field.
4. Select the End Date. The default is today’s date. You can browse for dates
with batch weights. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Mat File
Script field.

02/09/10 276
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

5. Enter the material file script (file where batch weights data is stored in the
Spectrum). The default is mat_file.x. (To export load-level batch weights,
enter mat_file_by_load.x.) Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the File
Name field.
6. Enter the name of the file to which batch weights will be exported. The
default is mat_rec.dat. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Directory
field.
Remember: DOS file names can only have 8 characters, a period, then a 3-
character extension.
7. Enter the directory to which batch weights will be copied. The default is the
3-letter abbreviation for the current day of the week (e.g. Tue). (Note: The
browse list lets you choose from a list of 3-letter abbreviations for days of the
week.) Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Full Path and File Name
field.
8. If you want to use another file path and name besides the ones specified in the
Directory and File Name fields, enter it here.
9. Press [F1] to export the batch weights.

02/09/10 277
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

PROPER SHUTDOWN WHEN EOD IS NOT RUN

The system automatically shuts down at the end of an “End of” process. If you shut
down the Spectrum without performing an “End of” process, always perform the
proper shutdown procedure as explained below. Never power off the computer
unless you run an “End of” process or you perform the following shutdown
procedure.

1. Select MAIN MENU­QUIT SPECTRUM. A warning screen appears.

2. Press [F1] to acknowledge the warning. The system begins the shutdown
process (this may take a few minutes). The Spectrum system informs you
when shutdown is complete.
3. Turn off the power to the Spectrum computer.

02/09/10 278
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

DISK UTILITIES
From the DISK UTILITIES MENU you can back up and restore the database, as well as
format floppy disks and perform other specialized functions. The options listed
below are the only ones you should use. They are discussed in this section. The
remaining options are either duplicated in the “End Of” processes, or should only be
used with the authorization of Command Alkon Support Services personnel.

• Floppy/Removable Media Backup & Restore

• Hard Disk Backup & Restore
• Batch Weights Backup & Restore
• Export Tickets to DOS File
• Export Batch Weights to QC Helper
• Format Disk
• Import Data Files

Disk Utilities Menu

02/09/10 279
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FLOPPY/REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP & RESTORE

This option lets you back up the Spectrum database to a floppy disk or USB
removable device. It also lets you restore the database from a floppy disk or USB
removable device. In addition, you can format a floppy disk or USB removable
device.

Note: Before you back up to USB removable device, make sure the
device has been set up, formatted, and connected as described in
the document “Data Transfer From/To a USB Device”.

The operations mentioned above are performed from the following screen, which
appears when you select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­
FLOPPY / REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP & RESTORE.

Backup & Restore – Floppy/Removable Disk

ª BACKUPS TO FLOPPY DISK OR USB REMOVABLE DEVICE

While most backups are completed in the “End of” processes, backups done from the
DISK UTILITIES menu offer additional flexibility in that you can designate which
database files to backup. Procedures for backing up to floppy disk and USB
removable device are given next.

TO BACK UP TO FLOPPY DISK:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ FLOPPY /

REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP & RESTORE.

02/09/10 280
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

2. The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry. Press
[ENTER] to accept Backup and move the cursor to the Drive field.

You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do

CAUTION!
so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel.

3. The default value for the Drive field is First. Press [ENTER] to select this
entry. The cursor moves to the Directory field.
First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation.
Second is valid if you have two floppy drives.
USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and
connected to the PC.
4. The default for the Directory field is Database. Press [ENTER] to accept
this value. The cursor moves to the Files field.
5. Select one of the following options and press [ENTER]:
• All
• Data Files
• Customers
• Mixes/Ingredients
• Orders
• Projects
• Trucks
6. Press [F1] to start the backup process. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Another message tells you when backup is complete.

TO BACK UP TO USB REMOVABLE DEVICE:

Note: Before you back up to USB removable device, make sure the
device has been set up, formatted, and connected as described in
the document “Data Transfer From/To a USB Device”.

Procedures for backing up to a USB removable device are the same as those for
backing up to floppy disk, except that USB must be entered in the Drive field. One
benefit of using a USB removable device is increased storage capacity.

02/09/10 281
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

ª RESTORES FROM FLOPPY DISK OR USB REMOVABLE DEVICE

Note: Before you restore from a USB removable device, make sure the
device has been set up, formatted, and connected as described in
the document “Data Transfer From/To a USB Device”.

The Restore function is used to restore lost data (usually because of system failure).
You can restore data from either a floppy disk or USB removable device.

You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do

CAUTION!
so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel.

TO RESTORE FROM FLOPPY DISK:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ FLOPPY /

REMOVABLE MEDIA BACKUP & RESTORE.
2. The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry. Select
Restore from the browse list and press [ENTER]. Restore appears in the
Operation field. Press [ENTER] to move the cursor to the Drive field.
3. The default value for the Drive field is First. Press [ENTER] to select this
entry. The cursor moves to the Directory field.
First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation.
Second is valid if you have two floppy drives.
USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and
connected to the PC.
4. The default for the Directory field is Database. Press [ENTER] to accept
this value. The cursor moves to the Files field.
5. From the browse list, select one of the following options and press [ENTER]:
• All
• Data Files
• Customers
• Mixes/Ingredients
• Orders
• Projects
• Trucks
6. Press [F1] to start the restore process. Follow the on-screen instructions.
When the restore process is complete, the system automatically reboots.

TO RESTORE FROM USB REMOVABLE DEVICE:

USB removable device restore procedures are the same as those for restoring
from floppy disk, except that USB must be entered in the Drive field.

02/09/10 282
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

HARD DISK BACKUP & RESTORE

When an End of Day process is run, the entire database can be backed up. However,
files cannot be backed up individually and the database cannot be restored through
the End of Day process. This is where the Hard Disk Backup & Restore disk
utilities option is useful. Through this option, all or parts of the database can be
backed up to or restored from the hard drive.

Hard disk backup and restore functions are performed from the following screen,
which appears when you select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK
UTILITIES­ HARD DISK BACKUP & RESTORE.

Backup & Restore – Hard Drive

ª TO BACK UP TO HARD DISK:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ HARD

DISK BACKUP & RESTORE. The above screen appears.

• A flashing message on this screen advises you to not

continue unless other plants are idle. The reason is that
CAUTIONS! you could corrupt the database and seriously impede
batching operations.
• You should only use the Restore operation when directed
to do so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel.

2. The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry. Press
[ENTER] to accept Backup and move the cursor to the Directory field.

02/09/10 283
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

3. The default for the Directory field is Database. Press [ENTER] to accept
this value. The cursor moves to the Files field.
4. Select one of the following options from the browse list and press [ENTER].
The entry appears in the Files field.
• All
• Data Files
• Customers
• Mixes/Ingredients
• Orders
• Projects
• Trucks
5. Press [ENTER] if you need to change the path and backup file name (default
is /usr/spec/db.bak). Note: When an End of Day process is run, the database
is automatically backed up to /usr/spec/db.bak.
6. Press [F1] to start the backup process. On-screen messages tell you when the
backup is started and completed.

ª TO RESTORE FROM HARD DISK:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ HARD

DISK BACKUP & RESTORE.

You should only use the Restore operation when directed to do

CAUTION!
so by Command Alkon Support Services personnel.

2. The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry. Select
Restore from the browse list and press [ENTER]. Press [ENTER] again to
move the cursor to the Directory field.
3. The default for the Directory field is Database. Press [ENTER] to use this
value. The cursor moves to the Files field.
Or, select Custom from the browse list and press [ENTER]. Press [ENTER]
again to move to the Files field.
4. Select one of the following options from the browse list and press [ENTER].
The entry appears in the Files field.

NOTE: If you select Custom in the Directory field, the only thing you
can select in the Files field is All.
• All
• Data Files
• Customers
• Mixes/Ingredients

02/09/10 284
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

• Orders
• Projects
• Trucks
5. Press [ENTER] to move to the Directory Name field if you need to change
the path and restore file name (default is /usr/spec/db.bak).
6. Press [F1] to start the restore process. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Other messages tell you what is going on (e.g., purging old loads, restore
completed, etc.). When the restore process is complete, the system
automatically reboots.

02/09/10 285
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

BATCH WEIGHTS BACKUP & RESTORE

Note: Before you back up to or restore from a USB removable device,

make sure the device has been set up, formatted, and connected
as described in the document “Data Transfer From/To a USB
Device”.

Batch weights should be backed up at least once every 30 days. Normally, this is
done daily when the End of Day process is run. However, you can do this without
running an End of Day process. This is accomplished from the screen shown below.
Notice that a message at the top of the screen shows the load ID and date range for
batch weights not yet backed up.

NOTE: The number of days the system keeps batch weights is specified on
the SYSTEM DEFAULTS screen. If you have not backed up batch
weights 10 days after this default deadline, the system
automatically backs them up.

Batch Weights Backup & Restore

ª TO BACKUP BATCH WEIGHTS:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ BATCH

WEIGHTS BACKUP & RESTORE. The above screen appears.
2. The cursor is on the Operation field with Backup as the default entry. Press
[ENTER] to accept Backup and move the cursor to the Drive field.
3. Select the desired backup media in the Drive field and press [ENTER].
(First is the default.)

02/09/10 286
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation.

Second is valid if you have two floppy drives.
USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and
connected to the PC.
4. Press [F1] to start the backup process. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Another message tells you when backup is complete.

ª TO RESTORE BATCH WEIGHTS:

Batch weights stored on USB removable device can be viewed directly from the USB
removable device. If the USB removable device is not connected, the system reads
what is on the hard disk. Batch weights stored on floppy disk, however, must be
restored to the hard disk before they can be viewed. To restore batch weights to hard
disk:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ BATCH

WEIGHTS BACKUP & RESTORE.
2. The Operation field will be selected and Backup is the default operation.
Select Restore from the browse list and press [ENTER]. Press [ENTER]
again to move the cursor to the Drive field.
3. Select the desired restore media in the Drive field and press [ENTER]. (First
is the default.)
First refers to the standard floppy disk drive on your workstation.
Second is valid if you have two floppy drives.
USB can only be used if a USB removable device has been set up and
connected to the PC.
4. Press [F1] to start the restore process. Follow the on-screen instructions. A
message tells you when restore is complete.

02/09/10 287
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

EXPORT TICKETS TO DOS FILE

Note: Before you export to USB removable device, make sure the device
has been set up, formatted, and connected as described in the
document “Data Transfer From/To a USB Device”.

This utility lets you transfer ticket information to a DOS or Windows accounting
program, or to a QNX-formatted floppy disk or USB removable device.

Export Tickets

ª TO EXPORT TICKET DATA:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­EXPORT

TICKETS TO DOS FILE.
2. The Drive field is selected with A as the default entry. Possible entries (from
the browse list) are:
A First DOS Floppy
B Second DOS Floppy
C First DOS Hard Disk
D Second DOS Hard Disk
Q QNX Directory
W Winlink Directory
E USB Removable Device
Select the appropriate drive and press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the
Start Date field.
3. Select the Start Date. The default is today’s date. You can browse for dates
with tickets. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the End Date field.

02/09/10 288
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

4. Select the End Date. The default is today’s date. You can browse for dates
with tickets. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Ticket File Script
field.
5. Enter the ticket file script (file where ticket data is stored in Spectrum). The
default is ticket_file.x. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the File Name
field.
6. Enter the name of the file to which tickets will be exported. The default is
ticket.dat. (Remember: DOS file names can only have 8 characters, a period
then a 3-character extension.) Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the
Directory field.
7. Enter the directory to which ticket files will be copied. The default is the 3-
letter abbreviation for the current day of the week (e.g. Tue). (NOTE: The
browse list lets you choose from a list of 3-letter abbreviations for days of the
week.) Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Full Path and File Name
field.
8. If you want to use another file path and name besides the ones specified in the
Directory and File Name fields, enter it here.
9. Press [F1] to export the tickets.

02/09/10 289
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER

Note: Before you transfer data to a USB removable device, make sure
the device has been set up, formatted, and connected as described
in the document “Data Transfer From/To a USB Device”.

This utility lets you transfer batch weight information to Command Alkon’s QC
Helper, to a Microsoft Windows quality control program, or to a QNX-formatted
floppy disk of USB removable device.

Export Batch Weights

ª TO EXPORT BATCH WEIGHTS:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­EXPORT

BATCH WEIGHTS TO QC HELPER.
2. The Drive field is selected with A as the default entry. Possible entries (from
the browse list) are:
A First DOS Floppy
B Second DOS Floppy
C First DOS Hard Disk
D Second DOS Hard Disk
Q QNX Directory
W Winlink Directory
E USB Removable Device
Select the appropriate drive and press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the
Start Date field.

02/09/10 290
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

3. Select the Start Date. The default is today’s date. You can browse for dates
with batch weights. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the End Date
field.
4. Select the End Date. The default is today’s date. You can browse for dates
with batch weights. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Mat File
Script field.
5. Enter the material file script (file where batch weights data is stored in the
Spectrum). The default is mat_file.x. (To export load-level batch weights,
enter mat_file_by_load.x.) Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the File
Name field.
6. Enter the name of the file to which batch weights will be exported. The
default is mat_rec.dat. Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Directory
field.
Remember: DOS file names can only have 8 characters, a period, then a 3-
character extension.
7. Enter the directory to which batch weights will be copied. The default is the
3-letter abbreviation for the current day of the week (e.g. Tue). (Note: The
browse list lets you choose from a list of 3-letter abbreviations for days of the
week.) Press [ENTER]. The cursor moves to the Full Path and File Name
field.
8. If you want to use another file path and name besides the ones specified in the
Directory and File Name fields, enter it here.
9. Press [F1] to export the batch weights.

02/09/10 291
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

FORMAT DISKS
This utility allows you to format a floppy disk or USB removable device on your
Spectrum workstation. Spectrum allows you to format disks in QNX or DOS.
Floppy disks used for data backups must be formatted in QNX. Floppy disks used for
exporting ticket data must be formatted in DOS.

USB removable devices used for both data backups and ticket exports must be
formatted, first, in QNX then in DOS. If it is formatted in DOS then QNX, the DOS
partition will be wiped out by the QNX formatting.

Format Disk

ª TO FORMAT A FLOPPY DISK:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ FORMAT

DISK.
2. The Drive field is selected with First as the default entry. Use this if you
want to format a floppy disk in the standard floppy drive. In this case, press
[ENTER] to move to the Size of Floppy Disk field.
If you need to select another drive, press [F2] to browse the Drive field.
Select the appropriate drive and press [ENTER]. Press [ENTER] again to
move to the Size of Floppy Disk field.
The following table shows the type of formatting that can be accomplished
with each drive selection.

DRIVE TYPE OF FORMATTING

First Formats a disk placed in the first floppy drive in a

02/09/10 292
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

QNX format.
Second Formats a disk placed in the second floppy drive in
a QNX format.
A Formats a disk placed in the first floppy drive in a
DOS format.
B Formats a disk placed in the second floppy drive in
a DOS format.
USB Formats a USB removable device in a QNX format.
(See the instructions below for formatting a USB
removable device.)

3. In the Size of Floppy Disk field, 1.44 M is the default. (You can select
another one from the browse list, then press [ENTER] to enter it in this field.)
4. Press [F1] to start the formatting process. Follow the on-screen instructions.

ª FORMATTING A USB REMOVABLE DEVICE FOR QNX

Before you can write to a USB device from Spectrum, it must be formatted for QNX.
Only do this once because all data on the device is erased!

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ FORMAT

DISK.

2. In the Drive field, select USB.

3. Press [F1] then follow the on-screen instructions.

ª FORMATTING A USB REMOVABLE DEVICE FOR DOS

If the USB device will be used to transfer/store data in a DOS/Windows format, you
will need to format the device on a Windows PC. (The following example uses a
Windows XP SP2 PC.)

1. Connect the USB device to the Windows PC.

2. After Windows recognizes the device, open My Computer and locate the
icon/name for the USB device (it might be labeled “Removable Disk”).

3. Right Click on the USB device icon/name and select “Format”.

The Format window is displayed.

02/09/10 293
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

4. Make sure that the File System entry is set to “FAT”.

Note: A USB device formatted under Windows must be formatted
using the FAT File System to produce a T6 partition type that
QNX supports.

5. Click Start.

6. When formatting is finished, close and safely remove the USB device.

The USB device now contains a 100 MB DOS partition. The remainder of the
storage space on the device is the QNX partition.

02/09/10 294
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

IMPORT DATA FILES

This utility lets you import data files from a floppy disk. It is typically used for
importing mix designs. Up to ten data files can be imported. For each file, you must
enter the name of the file and the name of the Spectrum initialization file (see the
sample screen below).

Import Data Files

Note: The · in the first command on the above screen means you have to scroll
to the right to see the rest of the command. The complete command is:

ctdu –dqP product –M product_type=M.

ª TO IMPORT MIX DESIGNS:

1. Select MAIN MENU­SYSTEM MAINTENANCE­DISK UTILITIES­ IMPORT

DATA FILES.
2. Select the Node Number of your Spectrum computer and press [ENTER].
3. Select the Disk Drive containing the floppy disk. Choices are:
A First DOS Floppy
B Second DOS Floppy
C First DOS Hard Disk
D Second DOS Hard Disk
Q QNX Directory
W Winlink Directory
E USB Removable Device

02/09/10 295
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

4. Enter the appropriate pre-process commands, mix file name, and import “ini”
file. (See the sample screen on the previous page.) Be sure to enter a Y for
the prep commands and import line.
5. Press [F4]. The system deletes mix designs and material records from the
Spectrum, and imports mix designs from the floppy. (Slump information is
included in our example.)

02/09/10 296
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

INDEX
Customers Screen, 33
A
D
Aborting Batches, 211
Absolute Value Ingredients, 43 Dampening
Admix Designs Screen, 53 Scale Flow Control, 91
admix modifiers, 56 Database
Admixture Bottles Screen, 96 Adding a Record, 30
Assigning Materials, 104 Editing a Record, 30
Auto Bin Switching, 106 How Is the Database Organized?, 29
Viewing a Record, 31
What Is the Database?, 29
B What Is the Purpose of the Database?, 29
Backup & Restore Device Property Sets, 110
Batch Weights, 286 Disk Formatting, 292
Floppy or Zip Disk, 280 Disk Utilities, 279
Hard Drive, 283
Bar Code Printing, 148 E
Batch on Receipt, 174
Batch Setup Edit MMM Description Screen, 69
Adjusting Truck Charge Rate, 206 Effectiveness of Ingredients, 44
Adjustments to Moisture, 197 End of Day Procedures, 272
Adjustments to Water, 196 End of Month Inventory Report Flag, 273
Changing Target Weights, 195 Export
Edit Truck Code After Discharge, 203 batch weights, 276
Edit Truck Code Before Discharge, 199 Export Batch Weights to QC Helper, 290
Batch Setup Screen, 191 Export Tickets to DOS File, 288
Batch Weights, 217 Extra Devices Screen, 102
Selecting for Printing, 146
Batch Weights Export, 276
Batching Defaults, 113
F
Batching Operations Fast Feed, 81, 171
Aborting Batches, 211 Feed Configurations, 81
Basic Steps - Automatic Batching, 174 Feed Destinations Screen, 108
Batching Cycle, 170 Feed Types, 81, 171
Discharge Cycle, 173 Fields
Feed Sequencing, 172 Browseable, 23
Screens Used, 175 Definition, 14
Starting Discharge, 211 Selecting a Field, 22
Batching Screens Flow Control Dampening, 91
Batch Setup, 191 Formatting a Disk, 292
Concrete Calculator, 189 Freewheeling, 223
Graph, 207
Order Entry, 180
Order Index & Load Index, 175 G
Bin Swapping, 227 Graph Screen, 207
Bin Switching
Automatic, 106
Bins Screen, 76 H
Holding Tanks Screen, 98
C Hundred Weight Ingredients, 44

Concrete Calculator Screen, 189

Continuous Discharge, 114, 222 I
Continuous Run, 114, 222
Ice
Conveyor Belts Screen, 100
Corrections Based On, 130

02/09/10 297
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Import Data Files, 295 P

Ingredient Groups, 42
Ingredients Screen, 35 Percentage Ingredients, 43
Inventory PORT PARAMETERS SCREEN, 150
Clearing, 164 Power-Up Procedure, 18
Ingredient Inventory for All Plants, 160 Preact, 170
Ingredient Inventory for Single Plant, 159 Printer Setup Screen, 143
Ingredient Usage for All Plants, 162 Printing
Ingredient Usage for Single Plant, 161 Multi-Batch Printing, 146
Overview, 158 Printer Setup, 150
Recording Incoming, 163 Reports, 238
Single Resale Product, 59 Reprinting Tickets, 216
Usage for All Mix Designs, 52 Tickets, 212
Project Pricing, 67
Projects Screen, 64
J Property Sets, 110
Jog Feed, 82, 171
Q
L Quick Edit Screen, 228
Load Index Quick Load Feature, 224
Changing Order of Loads, 178 Quick Ticket Feature, 226
Load Index Screen, 178 Quit Spectrum Procedure, 20

M R
Manual Station Record – definition, 14
Labels, 131 Reports, 238
Material Assignments, 104 Cancel Printing, 239
Material Calculation Types, 126 Reprinting Tickets, 216
Material Calculations Screen, 123 Resale Products Screen, 57
Material Overview
Activating/Deactivating a Device, 231 S
Changing Feed & Discharge Parameters, 231
Reassigning Materials, 230 Sales Tax Rates Screen, 32
Material Overview Screen, 229 Scales Screen, 85
Menu Structure, 25 Screen Layout, 27
Metered Liquids Screen, 93 Screens
Mix Designs Screen, 45 Accessing, 21
Mixer Operation, 233 Exiting, 24
Mixers Screen, 234 Field Help, 24
Motion Detection, 89 Moving from Field to Field, 22
Multi-Batch Printing, 146 Selecting a Field, 22
Multi-Batching, 172, 222 Selecting Entries from Browseable Fields, 23
Shutdown Procedure, 20
Shutdown Without Running “End of” Processes, 278
N Slump, 70
Navigating the System, 21 Slump Table, 70
New Features, 15 Slurry Calculations, 128
Node, 14 Starting Discharge, 211
System Defaults, 119
O
T
Order Entry
To Change Order Pricing, 186, 187 Ticket (sample), 213
To Change Order Times, 185 Ticket Alias File, 135, 137
To Copy an Order, 187 Ticket Editing, 215
To Edit an Order, 184 Ticket Layout Editor Screen, 132
To Enter an Order, 184 Ticket Printing, 212
Order Entry Screen, 180 Ticket Reports, 216
ORDER INDEX SCREEN, 175 Ticket Scripts, 139

02/09/10 298
Spectrum User’s Guide (Ver. 6.24+)

Timed Feed, 81, 171 U

Tolerance Error Symbols, 214, 221
Truck Washout, 232 Ulink-Style Admix Modifiers, 56
Trucks Screen, 62 User’s Guide Terminology, 13
Users, 165

02/09/10 299